DL105 PLC DL05/06 PLC CLICK PLCs DL205 PLC DL305 PLC

DL105 PLC DL05/06 PLC CLICK PLCs DL205 PLC DL305 PLC
CLICK PLCs
Section 2
In this interactive PDF
you can:
DL05/06 PLC
Section 3
• Use bookmarks to
navigate by product
category
• Use bookmarks to
save, search, print
or e-mail the catalog
section
DL105 PLC
• Click on part #s
to link directly to
our online store for
current pricing, specs,
stocking information
and more
Section 4
DL205 PLC
Section 5
Section 6
,i
nly
red
rde
fo
PLC Products
.S o
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m
the U
Section 7
in
Available
DL405 PLC
PLCs
DL305 PLC
by
6p
m
ET.,
add
ition
al sh
ly.
ipping charges may app
e5–1
DL205 - Most Cost-effective Micro Modular PLC Available
Two counting/pulse output modules
D2-CTRINT supports two 5 kHz counters or one quadrature input
or one 5 kHz output. One module only per system.
What is it?
The DL205 series PLC is a micro modular PLC that allows you to
drastically lower your control system cost. This PLC has the necessary specifications to replace PLCs costing two to three times as
much. Check out our prices and see for yourself!
H2-CTRIO supports four 100 kHz counters or two quadrature
inputs with two 25 kHz pulse train outputs. Multiple modules allowable.
Related products include:
• Industrial DIN-rail mountable telephone modem and an industrial
DIN-rail mountable Ethernet hub/switch
• ZIPLink connector modules - relay, fuse and LED
options (See Terminal Blocks & Wiring section.)
• Connectivity to SureServo and SureStep motion products
What’s it got?
The DL205 offers CPUs that provide a wide range of power
and features while minimizing cost. For instance, our most
advanced CPU, the D2-260, offers 30.4K of total
memory (15.8K of program memory) and can support up to
16,384 I/O points.The D2-260 has two built-in communication ports that, depending on the specifications of each, can
support devices such as HMIs, serial networks, remote I/O
and ASCII devices. Its 280+ RLL (Relay Ladder Logic) and
new IBox instructions give it the ability to be part of a large
and powerful control system with a price that meets a tiny budget!
Four base sizes with built-in power supply support 12/24 VDC,
110/220 VAC and 125 VDC (6 and 9 slot only) power sources.
Over 35 powerful I/O and communication modules are available
from deiscrete and analog to high-speed counter and Ethernet
modules.
Relay ladder logic CPUs
Windows®CE based CPUs
DL205 CPUs
Four RLL (Relay Ladder Logic based) CPUs
D2-230 - 2.4K memory, maximum 256 I/O
D2-240 - 3.8K memory, maximum 896 I/O
D2-250-1 - 14.8K memory, maximum 2048 I/O
D2-260 - 30.4K memory, maximum 8192 I/O
Windows CE-based CPU for Think & Do
H2-WPLC3-EN - 100 MHz CPU with 8 MB ROM/ 8 MB RAM
Discrete input/
output modules
DC Input Modules
D2-08ND3
8-pt. 12-24V sink/source
D2-16ND3-2 16-pt. 24V sink/source
D2-32ND3-2 32-pt. 5-15V sink/source
D2-32ND3
32-pt. 24V sink/source
e5–2
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
F2-08DA-1
32 pt module with optional
ZIPLink wiring system
F2-08DA-2
AC input modules
D2-08NA-1
D2-08NA-2
D2-16NA
4-pt. 12-24V sink, 4A/pt
8-pt. 12-24V sink
8-pt. 12-24V source
16-pt. 12-24V sink
16-pt. 12-24V source
16-pt. 12-24 VDC sink
16-pt. 12-24 VDC source
32-pt. 12-24V sink
32-pt. 12-24V source
F2-08TRS
D2-12TR
16 pt module with
removable terminal block
8-pt. 18-220VAC
8-pt. 20-125VAC, high current
12-pt. 18-110VAC
4-pt. 4A/pt. 8A/module
8-pt. 1A/pt. 4A/module
8-pt. 8 form A,
10A/common
8-pt. 5 form A,
3 form C, 7A/pt
12-pt. 12 form A, 1.5A/pt
ses
le fu
ovab
m
e
R
4-pt. DC in, 4-pt. relay out
Analog and
Temperature modules
Analog input modules
F2-04AD-1
F2-04AD-2
F2-04AD-1L
F2-04AD-2L
F2-08AD-1
F2-08AD-2
Wide range of low cost analog
and thermocouple modules
4-ch. 4-20mA
4-ch. 0-5V, 0-10V, -5 to +5V, -10 to +10V
4-ch. 4-20mA (uses 12VDC supply)
4-ch. 0-5V, 0-10V, -5 to +5V, -10
to +10V (uses 12VDC supply)
8-ch. 4-20mA
8-ch. 0-5V, 0-10V, -5 to +5V, -10 to +10V
Analog output modules
F2-02DA-1
F2-02DA-2
F2-02DA-1L
F2-02DA-2L
F2-02DAS-1
F2-02DAS-2
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
F2-04RTD
AC Motors
4-ch. RTD input
0.15C resolution
4-ch. 16-bit thermocouple
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
and millivolt
Combination
D2-08CDR
Software
Temperature
F2-04THM
Relay output modules
D2-04TRS
D2-08TR
F2-08TR
Field I/O
F2-4AD2DA 4-ch. in/2-ch. out 4-20mA
F2-8AD4DA-1 8-ch. in/4-ch. out 4-20mA
F2-8AD4DA-2 8-ch. in/4-ch. out 0-5V, 0-10V
AC output modules
D2-08TA
F2-08TA
D2-12TA
PLCs
Combination analog
8-pt. 110VAC
8-pt. 220VAC
16-pt. 110VAC
DC output modules
D2-04TD1
D2-08TD1
D2-08TD2
D2-16TD1-2
D2-16TD2-2
F2-16TD1P
F2-16TD2P
D2-32TD1
D2-32TD2
Company
Info.
8-ch. 4-20mA, sink/source
selectable
8-ch. 0-5V, 0-10V
2-ch. 4-20mA
2-ch. 0-5V,
0-10V, -5 to +5V,
-10 to +10V
2-ch. 4-20mA
(12VDC supply)
2-ch. 0-5V,
0-10V, -5 to +5V,
-10 to +10V
(uses 12VDC supply)
2-ch. 4-20mA, 16-bit isolated
2-ch. 0-5V, 0-10V 16-bit isolated
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Communication modules
Ethernet
H2-ECOM
Master/Slave
Ethernet 10Base-T
or H2-ECOM100
Ethernet 100Base-T
Ethernet Fiber H2-ECOM-F
Master/Slave Ethernet 10Base-FL
DeviceNet
F2-DEVNETS-1 - DeviceNet Base
Controller (Slave)
Profibus
H2-PBC - Profibus Base Controller (Slave)
SDS
F2-SDS-1 - Smart Distributed System
Base Controller (Slave)
Serial/Modbus D2-DCM - RS-232/422 DirectNET
master/slave, Modbus RTU slave
CoProcessor
F2-CP128 - BASIC Comm. CoProcessor,
3 ports, 128K memory, RS-232/422/485
master/slave
Expansion I/O - Add up to four DL205 bases of expansion I/O
to the D2-260 CPU or up to two bases for D2-250-1. It’s deterministic and low cost.
Ethernet Remote I/O - Use a 10 Mbit Ethernet Remote Master
module (H2-ERM) in a local DL205 base and add up
to 16 bases of DL205 I/O, 16 Terminator I/O systems or four
DL405 local I/O systems (with Ethernet Base Controllers).
Remote I/O - Use one or more D2-RMSM remote I/O
masters in a local DL205 base and connect up to seven remote
DL205 bases on each (with D2-RSSS in slave). The
bottom port of the D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs can also act
as a remote I/O master.
Four base sizes
3-slot base
D2-03B-1 110/220 VAC
D2-03BDC1-1 12/24 VDC
4-slot base
D2-04B-1 110/220 VAC
D2-04BDC1-1 12/24 VDC
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
6-slot base
D2-06B-1 110/220 VAC
D2-06BDC1-1 12/24 VDC
D2-06BDC2-1 125 VDC
9-slot base
Appendix
Part Index
D2-09B-1 110/220 VAC
D2-09BDC1-1 12/24 VDC
D2-09BDC2-1 125 VDC
PLC Products
Pneumatics
e5–3
DL205: 11
11 Reasons Why This Is The
Most Practical PLC Money Can Buy!
1
PID
2-for-1 prices
Check out our prices on everything from I/O
modules to CPUs and you’ll see that our
everyday list prices are among the lowest in the
industry. For instance, you can buy two of our
D2-260 systems for the price of one of AllenBradley’s CompactLogix CPUs. Will that help
your budget?
2
See Software
section
for detailed
features and
specifications
provide a
Loop faceplatesveral loops
se
quick look at
Practical built-in
communication includes
easy-to-use ASCII
instructions
u
Trend for varioP
Including SP,
elimin
Auto-tune can to t
trying
frustration of
Our D2-260 CPU offers
two built-in communication ports. The top port
supports programming and operator interfaces. The bottom port supports the same, as
well as ASCII input and output (bar code
readers, label printers, scales, servo drives),
Modbus RTU master/slave, and Remote I/O
master. All that just in the CPU!
3
Practical
communication
Many communication modules are available for
DL205 PLCs, including Ethernet, DeviceNet,
Profibus, and a general purpose serial communication module that supports HMIs, programming, operator panels, Modbus RTU slave and
DirectNET slave.
4
Practical
counting/pulse
Our high-speed counter
module (H2-CTRIO) has four independently configurable timer/counter channels
(up to 100 kHz) and two pulse output
generators (up to 25 kHz). The easy-touse configuration tool is included in our
PLC programming software, so it’s a snap
to integrate with your other application
logic. For counting on a shoestring
budget, the 2-CTRINT module
offers two 5 kHz counters, one up/down
counter, or a variable pulse train output.
e5–4
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
5
Programming software includes auto-tune PID
Program the DL205 family of PLCs with DirectSOFT5. Customers tell us that it’s
one of the easiest PLC programming packages to use!
• Point and click or function key editing
• Can use nicknames or data points for writing programs
• I/O cross reference and element usage windows for keeping track of addresses used
D View
eters,
us loop param Bias
d
PV Output, an
ate the
tune a loop
Company
Info.
PLCs
Field I/O
Auto-tune PID
Some of the traditional PLC companies
require a separate ladder program for
The D2-260 CPU has over 280 instructions, including:
each PID loop and for loop scheduling.
• New IBox pre-programmed function blocks • ASCII input or output
We make it automatic. Get up and
• Floating-point math
• Timed and hardware triggered subroutines running faster!
• Time and event-based drum sequencers
• Fill out a chart for alarms
and ramp/soak
• Automatic loop scheduling
• Programming software includes
In addition to remote I/O and
the loop tune screen with trending
Ethernet remote I/O, the DL205
(shown to the left)
family supports local expansion
• Loop auto-tuning, which allows the
I/O! Up to four DL205 bases can
CPU to automatically determine the
be connected (30 meters total) to
near-optimum loop settings
a local base that contains a D2260 CPU (two expansion bases
with a D2-250-1 CPU). With
expansion I/O, all bases are
updated synchronously with each
I/O scan for a deterministic
system.
6
Expansion I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
7
Temp.
Sensors
Super flexible coprocessor module
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Create custom BASIC programs to interface to barcode readers, VF drives or other intelligent ASCII devices.
The module comes with 128K memory, 26 MHz CPU and three independent communication ports.
8
Relays/
Timers
Practical low-cost analog
Do you need up to 16-bit resolution, up to eight channels of input or output, combination, RTD or thermocouple
modules? We’ve got it all! And many of our modules have selectable unipolar or bipolar voltage range options
(0-5V, 0-10V, ±5V or ±10V) too.
9
10
Process
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
High current modules
Circuit
Protection
We offer a wide range of high current relay modules that can support up to 10A per point.
Enclosures
Practical temperature sensing
Tools
The DL205 series features a four-channel thermocouple module (F2-04THM) that is
jumper-configurable for the nine most popular thermocouple types, as well as four common voltage ranges.
Pneumatics
Appendix
Numerous DL205 modules can
be used with our ZIP Link connection systems. Connect even
32-point modules in seconds!
11
Practical high-density modules
and ZipLink connections
Part Index
DL205 I/O modules offer a wide range of points per module including 4-pt., 8-pt., 12-pt., 16-pt. and
32-pt. modules. To help you wire them fast and inexpensively, we offer ZIPLink quick connection cables
and terminal blocks that allow you to connect the PLC I/O modules to terminal blocks in seconds. These
easily pay for themselves by reducing wiring costs. We also offer relay, fused and LED ZIPLink modules.
For information on our 5-second wiring solution, see ZIPLinks in the Terminal Blocks and Wiring
section.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–5
DL205 - Great Fit For On/Off Sequential Control
1
2
2-for-1 prices
on I/O
Our I/O prices are incredibly low. You can
often buy three of our modules for the price
of a single Allen-Bradley CompactLogix
module! This gives the DL205 a cost advantage on small I/O systems as well as large
systems. Over 19
discrete modules
are available on the
DL205
system,
ranging from 4point modules to
32-point densities.
--
Practical built-in
communications
now includes ASCII
in and out
The D2-260 CPU offers two built-in
communication ports. Connect a text panel
or touch panel to one port and a bar code
reader or scale to the second
port, or use any supported
protocol for PLC networking.
3
Expands from
8 I/O to 8,000 I/O
The DL205 PLC family is highly expandable. It offers four base sizes that can be
connected via local expansion I/O, serial
remote I/O and Ethernet remote I/O to
create a system as large as 8,192 I/O
addressed by a single D2-260 CPU.
4
Locate I/O anywhere
Reduce your wiring cost by locating
I/O near your field devices. Up to four
expansion bases of I/O (all
synchronously updated each
scan) can be placed 30
meters (total run) from the
local base. High speed
10baseT Ethernet bases (H2EBC) can each be located up
to 100 meters from a local
base with an Ethernet Remote
Master module (H2-ERM).
Fiber optic versions of these
Ethernet modules allow this
distance to be increased to
2,000 meters.
Serial remote I/O bases can
be located up to 1,200
meters (at 19.2K baud) from
the local base.
e5–6
PLC Products
Allen-Bradley
CompactLogix
I)
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Company
Info.
see Software section for full details
PLCs
5
Great sequential
instructions
Field I/O
Software
Think of our drum instruction as a software emulation of
a mechanical cam switch or a programmable limit
switch. The rotation (steps) of the drum is controlled by
time or events (inputs or control relays). As the drum
sequences through the steps in your application, up to
16 preconfigured outputs/control relays change state.
Drums are an efficient way to program sequential operations and our drums are made super easy to program
with point and click editing.
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
6
DL205 drum timer instruction
RLL, IBox and RLL+
Programming
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Our Relay Ladder Logic (RLL) incorporates IBoxes, intelligent modularized instructions, that perform simple to
complex ladder logic. RLL +, or “stage” programming,
incorporates instructions that allow you to break your
program into “stages” or states of a flow chart. Stage
may also help reduce your memory requirements and
scan time.
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
al
Traditiong
Wirin
Process
ZIPLink ™
Wiring
Relays/
Timers
Stage programming combines RLL instructions
with flow chart thinking.
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
7
High-density modules save space
and money, and can be wired in
seconds using ZIPLinks
The DL205 modules offer a variety of I/O density from four
I/O points per module up to 32 I/O points per module. These
modules are small and can get cramped when wiring. So we
developed a very low cost and fast way to wire them using
ZIPLinks. ZIPLink products include terminal block, feedthrough
terminals, relay terminals, fuse terminals and LED terminals
(good for high density inputs).
Want to save wiring time?
For more information on our “5-second wiring
solution”, check out the Terminal Blocks and
Wiring section.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Look for this symbol. Numerous DL205 modules
can be used with our ZIP Link connection systems
for easy 5-second wiring solutions!
PLC Products
e5–7
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
DL205 - Great Fit For Applications
With Analog and PID Control
Here’s why
The DL205 PLC family,
with all its peripheral
products, is a great choice
for applications that
combine PID, analog,
and sequential control
functions, such as batch
control, waste and water
treatment, monitoring
or control of remote
tank/well/pumping
stations, low cost
instrumentation/test
stands, and much more.
Check out the top seven
reasons why the DL205 is
a great fit for these
types of applications.
LookoutDirect HMI software
development package - $1,400.00
4
6” C-more
operator interface panel
F2-08DA-1, 8-channel 4-20 mA
sink/source selectable output for only
$299.00. Connects to almost any
analog device!
Ethernet communications
to PC systems
7
3
5
2
1
3
Level
transmitter
2 2
Pressure
transmitter
7
Ethernet remote I/O
e5–8
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
7
Auto-tune PID and RLL in one simple-touse programming package
1 2-for-1 prices on analog I/O
PLCs
Our analog I/O prices are incredibly low. Often, you can buy two of our
modules for the price of a single Allen-Bradley CompactLogix module.
This allows the DL205 to be cost advantaged on small I/O systems as well
as large systems.
2 Analog and temperature modules
connect to almost any device.
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
Loop faceplates provide
a quick look at several loops
The DL205 offers many analog modules, including thermocouple (16-bit) and
RTD (16-bit). Our modules support an incredible range of signals including
4-20 mA (sinking and sourcing), 0-5V, 0-10V, -5V to +5V, and -10V to +10V,
allowing the DL205 PLC to connect to almost any device including pressure
transmitters, proportional valves, AC drives, panel meters and more. Our
16-bit thermocouple module can also be configured to measure 16-bit input
signals of -5 VDC to +5 VDC, 0-156 mv, -156 mv to +156 mv.
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
The same software used for programming the DL205 also provides trend
graphs for various loop parameters, including SP, PV Output, and Bias
Auto-tune can eliminate the frustration
of trying to tune a loop!
6
For more information on Direct SOFT PLC programming software, see the Software section.
3 Built-in operator interface
connectivity, device networking, and ASCII communications
4 C-more panels for a low cost window into your application
Our C-more panels have some great features for process applications. Key features include
Factory symbol library (2,000 bit mapped graphical symbols), PID faceplates, recipe download
objects, meters, trend graphs, bar graphs, thumbwheel switch objects, data logging and more.
Variable frequency drive
controlled mixer
Expansion I/O
7
5 Ethernet
supports high
end computer
systems
Need to connect to a high
speed HMI or computer
system? We offer 10Base-T
and fiber optic Ethernet
communication modules.
The H2-ECOM is priced at
$285.00 and the fiber optic
version H2-ECOM-F is only
$355.00. Or get 100 Mbit
speed with the H2-ECOM100
for only $299.00.
Valve positioner
transmitter
The D2-260 with 16 built-in PID loops, and D2-250-1 with four built-in PID loops, allow you to
do PID control with ease. Some of the traditional PLC companies require a separate ladder
program for each loop and for loop scheduling. We made it automatic! Key features include:
fill-in chart for alarms and ramp/soak and automatic loop scheduling. The loop tune and trend
software is included in our DirectSOFT programming package. The loop auto-tuning allows the
CPU to automatically determine the near optimum loop settings.
7 Locate I/O anywhere
Reduce your wiring cost by putting the I/O next to thermocouples, sensors and other field devices by using
expansion bases, remote bases, Ethernet remote bases and even fiber optic remote bases. Our analog and
temperature modules work in all of these configurations.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
6 Built-in PID with auto-tune
Thermocouple
Steppers/
Servos
Photo
Sensors
The D2-250-1 and D2-260 offer two built-in communication ports. Connect a text panel or touch panel
to one port and a bar code reader or scale to the second port. The bottom port also supports networking
protocols such as DirectNET and Modbus RTU master/slave.
RTD
Company
Info.
PLC Products
e5–9
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
DL205 - Great Fit For CommunicationIntensive Applications
Here’s why
The DL205 PLC family offers incredible
connectivity options for a micro PLC,
making it suitable for almost any
communication-intensive application.
Check out the top six reasons why the DL205
is a great fit for these types of applications:
1
Built-in
communications
to operator
interfaces, PLC
networking, and more
The D2-250-1 and D2-260 CPUs offer two
built-in communication ports that support a
wide array of devices. The top port supports
programming and operator interfaces. The
bottom port on the D2-260 supports
RS -232/422/485
networking, along
with ASCII in/out,
Remote I/O master
and Modbus RTU
master/slave.
(If
using D2-260 CPU
you can connect this
port directly to our
GS series drives!)
Industrial DIN-rail mount
telephone modem
(MDM-TEL )
Program, troubleshoot or
collect data over the telephone line
via industrial modem!
e5–10
PLC Products
2
3
Telephone
modem support
AUTOMATIONDIRECT offers an industrial telephone modem (MDM-TEL) that allows
access to PLC data and programs via a telephone line. The rugged industrial telephone
modem mounts on a DIN-rail and easily
connects to our PLCs. Connecting telephone
modems to PLCs can be tricky, but this industrial telephone modem can be hooked up in
seconds. The modem allows for remote PLC
programming (use our DirectSOFT programming package over the phone), long
distance PLC-to-PLC communications, and
PLC
data
reporting to a
PC HMI.
Custom
communication
built by you
The F2-CP128 is a universal
communication CoProcessor module.
Create custom BASIC programs to interface to barcode readers, VF drives, or
other intelligent devices with various
protocols. (Write your own driver to a
unique serial device.) Comes with 128K
memory, 26 MHz CPU and three independent communication ports. Two
ports
support
master/slave
RS -232/422/485
and
the
third
supports RS-232.
Complex ASCII devices
bus RTU
ms, Mod
rts mode r scales, etc.
o
p
p
su
t fo
ort
22/485 p e, or ASCII in/ou
c
RS-232/4
Built-in perator interfa ce per port)
o
(one devi
to drives,
The modem
and PLC can
replace a highcost packaged
Remote Telemetry Unit
(RTU) that may already
be using a high-priced
PLC as its brain. It can
also be used for PLC to
PLC dialing triggered by
a PLC output. Saves
money on service calls, data acquisition and
up-and-down time reporting.
RS-232/R
purpose
general s RTU slave p
M
C
-D
2
u
D
T, Modb
DirectNE
supports
4 Built-in
ASCII
The D2-260 CPU supports ASCII input
and ASCII output. We designed powerful
fill-in-the-blank instructions that are used
within your RLL program to allow easy
communication to or from ASCII devices.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Company
Info.
PLCs
5
Industrial Ethernet switch/hub for more
deterministic communications
405 I/O with Ethernet base controller
Field I/O
Software
You can use most off-the-shelf Ethernet hubs or switches with our Ethernet
communication products. However, we wanted to offer an industrial Ethernet
switch that would make your communications easy to set up and extremely
reliable. This hub/switch (E-SW05U)
is DIN-rail mountable, and
powered by 24 VDC. Use it to connect
our DL205, DL405 or Terminator I/O
and our GS1 and GS2 drives via our
AutomationDirect
Ethernet drive card (GS-EDRV), all on
GS2 VFD
the same network.
with Ethernet
205 I/O with Ethernet base controller
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Terminator I/O with Ethernet base controller
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
communication
card
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Drives, servos, etc.
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Ethernet
H2-ECOM ation
ic
n
u
Comm
Ethernet
H2-ERM aster
te
remo m
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Industrial DIN-rail mount Ethernet
Switch (E-SW05U)
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
.00)
or ($349
oProcess
C
n
o
ti
a
unic
8 Comm
F2-CP12
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
ort
RS422 p
protocols
Program DL205 PLCs and C-more
panels over an Ethernet network!
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Multiple C-more panels
on Ethernet network
Tools
PC connected via Ethernet
6
Ethernet communications
for touch panels and PLCs
Pneumatics
Have you ever wanted to program multiple PLCs and touch panels over
Ethernet, or have multiple touch panels connected to a single PLC? Not a
problem. Use our general purpose H2-ECOM module in the DL205 base and
connect it to multiple C-more panels, along with a PC with DirectSOFT, via a
standard off-the-shelf Ethernet hub! And for super-high speed peer communications between PLCs or to a PC, use the H2-ECOM100 for 100 Mbit rates.
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Appendix
PLC Products
e5–11
DL205 - Great Fit For Simple Data Acquisition
and Supervisory Control
Here’s why
The DL205 PLC family, along with our other
value packed products, gives you the components to build powerful and cost-effective data
acquisition with supervisory control systems.
These can range from a handful of I/O points
to thousands of I/O points.
3-for-1 prices makes the
DL205 the low price
winner 1
Data acquisition systems often require
many data points to be collected. This
may include dozens, hundreds or perhaps
thousands of discrete, analog or temperature inputs. This type of system can be
extremely expensive with traditional PLCs
or SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition) systems. Previous pages
describe how you can often buy two or
three DL205 I/O modules (discrete and
analog) for the price of one module from
some traditional suppliers. Add our
DataWorx data acquisition software and
you can afford to do more when using
AUTOMATIONDIRECT.
Program our PLCs and
touch panels over
Ethernet 3
Our DL205, DL405 systems and C-more
panels can be programmed over an
Ethernet network with the same low cost
software that you buy every day from
AUTOMATIONDIRECT to program nonnetworked PLC systems and touch panels.
High-speed, low-cost
Ethernet connects I/0
and VFDs 2
Directsoft RLL programming and PC-based HMI (such as LookoutDirect)
over Ethernet to multiple PLCs
High-speed Ethernet
links PLC systems to a
supervisory system 4
Use off-the-shelf Ethernet hubs to communicate between multiple PLCs (peer-topeer between PLCs) and a supervisory
system. You can also communicate
among our PLCs that support
Ethernet. We even offer a DIN-rail
mount, industrial high-performance Ethernet hub/switch for very
strict deterministic requirements.
Now that’s cost-effective distributed control!
The DL205 supports a wide range of
Ethernet-based products for connecting
additional field I/O (our Terminator I/O,
DL205 I/O, DL405 I/O) or even variable
speed drives to your monitoring or control
system! All of our Ethernet products are
priced so you can take advantage of
Ethernet for almost any application.
AutomationDirect industrial Ethernet hub/switch
Part # E-SW05U $272.00 (or use any off-the-shelf hub)
Add our Terminator I/O for low cost field I/O
Connect our GS
family of VFDs to a
PLC via Ethernet
e5–12
PLC Products
Ethernet interface GS-EDRV ($200.00)
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Company
Info.
A base of DL205 I/O on DeviceNet
via DeviceNet Base Controller
module F2-DEVNETS-1
PLCs
Field I/O
Devicenet
Software
Profibus
C-more &
other HMI
A base of DL205 I/O
on Profibus via
Profibus Base Controller
module (H2-PBC)
AC Drives
AC Motors
Ethernet/Profibus/DeviceNet
Supervisory Master PC
Power
Transmiss.
Low cost DeviceNet
and Profibus slaves 5
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Many I/O systems are required to support traditionally high-cost DeviceNet and Profibus networks. Now you
can beat these often artificially inflated prices with one of our DeviceNet or Profibus slave modules in the CPU
slot of a DL205 base. This allows you to attach our wide variety of low-cost I/O
systems to new and existing DeviceNet and Profibus networks.
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Locate operator panels anywhere 6
10” C-more
Limit
Switches
Multiple serial communication
ports available on our PLCs allow
you to locate operator panels near
the operator.
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
l
Locnasion
a
Exp
6” C-more
Relays/
Timers
up to 30 meters
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Locate I/O anywhere 7
Locate I/O 2,000 meters
from CPU base with fiber optic
Ethernet products!
Tools
Reduce your wiring cost by placing I/O near your field devices. Up to four expansion
bases of I/O (all synchronously updated each scan) can be placed up to 30 meters from
the PLC CPU base. High-speed 10Base-T Ethernet bases (H2-EBC) can be located up
to 100 meters from a local base with an Ethernet remote master module (H2-ERM).
Fiber optic versions of these Ethernet modules
up to 30 meters
allow this distance to be increased to 2,000
meters. Serial remote I/O bases can be located
up to 1,200 meters (at 19.2 Kbaud) from the
local base. All of these remote bases support
the DL205’s discrete, analog and temperature
modules.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–13
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
DL205 - Great Fit For
Applications That Need
Counting and/or Pulse Output
Two practical
Here’s why
The DL205 PLC family offers two different modules for applications
that require counting and pulse output features. Read on to see which
module best fits your application needs
The
D2-CTRINT
offers:
One 5 kHz up/down
counter or quadrature
input
or two 5 kHz counters
or
Phase A
1
Counting or pulse
output
Simple but sweet!
Phase B
The DL205 counter interface module (D2CTRINT) is a great way
perform basic counting or pulse
output with a DL205 system. Basically, this is
a discrete I/O module that counts or
generates pulse and has been designed into
the DL205 CPUs, hence the name
Counter Interface. The D2-CTRINT can be
configured to perform any one of the
following operations:
• Quadrature encoder input for clockwise and
counter-clockwise position
• Two, 5 kHz high-speed counters
• Programmable pulse output with external
interrupts and separate acceleration and
deceleration profiles for positioning and
velocity control (5K pulses max per second)
• Four external interrupt inputs for immediate
responses to tasks
• Pulse catch feature allowing the CPU to read
four inputs, each having a pulse width as
small as 5 msec
• Programmable filters for reading up to 4 input
signals to ensure input signal integrity
Limitations: There are some limitations.
Most often, this module can be used for only one of
the functions listed. It cannot use the pulse output
and counter features together for closed loop control.
Some features are not available when used with certain
DL205 CPUs. Only one D2-CTRINT module can be used
per system and it must be placed in the I/O slot next to
the CPU. All programming is done through RLL logic.
one 5 kHz pulse
output to a stepper
or servo drive
e5–14
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
alternatives
Company
Info.
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
2
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
The H2-CTRIO
offers:
High-performance
counting and pulse
output with fill-inthe-blank software
Two 100 kHz
up/down
counters or
quadrature inputs
The DL205 high-speed counter module
(H2-CTRIO) is our
high-performance, high-feature offering for
counting and pulse output. This module comes
with a software utility that makes configuring the
module as simple as clicking on
features and filling in the blanks. No
ladder logic is needed to operate this
as a counter module, although you
may use some RLL to coordinate your
PLC program.
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Key features include:
• Two quadrature encoder
inputs or four 100 kHz high-speed
counters (32-bit count range
for +/-2.1 billion counts)
Fill-in-the-blank configuration of counters and pulse outputs saves time.
• Two programmable pulse outputs
support Trapezoid, Velocity S-curve,
or program controlled Dynamic
Positioning, or four discrete isolated
outputs for responding to counter
presets (128 presets)
• Pulse catch feature (allows the module
to read four inputs, each having a
pulse width as small as 5 msec)
Pulse out
• Programmable filters for reading up
to four input signals to ensure input
signal integrity
• Can use multiple modules in local DL205 base
(any slot except slot 0)
Limitations: All input functions or all output functions can
not be done simultaneously. Counting and pulse out can
be done simultaneously, however the module does not
internally support closed loop control.
Motor
Controls
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
or four 100 kHz counters
AND
Two 25 kHz pulse
outputs for stepper
or servo drives
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
or
four built-in
discrete isolated
outputs to respond
to counter presets
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
PLC Products
e5–15
DL205 - Great Fit For Applications
That Need Simple Stepper or Servo Control
Here’s why
There are many process applications that require
accurate motion control at a fast pace, without
expecting exact precision and blazing speed. The
DL205 PLC, with the counter/pulse output modules’
high speed counting capability and high frequency
pulse output (H2-CTRIO), offers a viable stepper
and servo control solution for open-loop motion
control.
C-more Touch panel
Here’s how
When coupled with our SureServo or SureStep
motion products, the resulting system is
extremely cost-effective.
A DL205-based motion
control system is very wellsuited to applications such as:
• cut-to-length
• indexing tables or conveyors
AutomationDirect DL205 PLC with H2-CTRIO module
using pulse output feature
AutomationDirect DirectSOFT PLC
programming software screens
Pulse output from AutomationDirect
H2-CTRIO module
(see section 9 of this catalog)
e5–16
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Company
Info.
Rotary indexing liquid fill application
PLCs
Field I/O
PLC with CTRIO module
Software
C-more &
other HMI
Fill spout
CTRIO pulse output signals
AC Drives
AC Motors
Stepper or
servo drive
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Stepper motor
inside housing
Circular turn table
The SureServo family of brushless servo systems from
AUTOMATIONDIRECT is fully digital and offers a rich set of features
at dynamite prices. Choose from eight standard servo motors
that can be used in combination with one of three standard
servo drives.
These servos are designed for flexibility and quick implementation. SureServo drives accept a wide range of command
sources:
(see section 16 of catalog)
For configuration, tuning and diagnostics, use the drive’s integrated keypad/display or take advantage of the free SureServo
Pro™ PC-based software. Tune the system easily with adaptive
• Built-in motion controller with preset
position, velocity or torque
• Select presets with switch inputs
and/or
the multi-drop Modbus serial interface
• Position commands with “pulse and
direction”or CW/CCW format
• Encoder follower
• Analog voltage Velocity or Torque
command
• Eight standard systems from 100 W to 3
kW
• Use with DirectLOGIC PLCs or any other
host control
• Drives feature on-board indexer and
adaptive tuning modes
• Free set-up software
• 30-day money-back guarantee
• 2 year warranty
auto-tuning selections or manual mode. Adapt to diverse applications with configurable I/O,including 8 digital inputs, 5 digital
outputs, 2 analog monitors and a scalable encoder output.
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
(see section 16 of catalog)
The SureStep stepping family has four standard motors to handle
a wide range of automation applications such as woodworking,
assembly, and test machines. Our square frame or high torque
style stepping motors are the latest technology, resulting in the best
torque to volume. We have NEMA 17, 23, and 34 mounting
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Ease of use out
of the box!
flanges and holding torque ranges from 83 oz-in to 434 oz-in.
A 20-foot extension cable with locking connector is a standard
accessory to interface any of the four stepping motors to the
microstepping drive, and can be easily cut to length if desired.
PLC Products
e5–17
Part Index
DL205 WinPLC - Great Fit For
Control With Advanced Data
Handling and Versatile Connectivity
What is a WinPLC ?
Advanced data handling
The WinPLC is a hybrid PC-PLC solution
that brings the best of the PLC and the PC
Control worlds together. The WinPLC
module fits into the CPU slot of the popular
DL205 series PLC. The WinPLC offers both
deterministic control and connectivity to
control devices and business systems. With
the WinPLC, you’ll benefit from:
• PLC reliability
- Diskless operation
- Non-volatile program and
data memories
- Direct backplane access to I/O
• Microsoft Windows connectivity
• PC-Style Data Management Tools
• 4 MB ROM/2 MB RAM or
8 MB ROM/8 MB RAM models
Think & Do software handles advanced
math functions, formulas, string data and
array manipulation in simple, plainlanguage format. Think & Do gives you
the power and flexibility of custom
programming for math and data management in the same development environment as the control logic. No complex RLL
or PLC coprocessor required! Save time
and money both developing and maintaining your applications with Think & Do’s
powerful data tools. Just “fill in the blanks”
for most data operations, including up to
64 PID loops.
Why is the WinPLC a
great fit for data
handling and
connectivity?
If your application requires complex
math, data manipulation (even
string arrays) or integrated connectivity as
well as I/O control, a WinPLC is the best
solution. Check out the top reasons why the
DL205 WinPLC is a great fit for these types
of applications.
Built-in and expansion
serial ports
With one native port and up to three 3-port
serial modules (H2-SERIO),
a WinPLC can handle up to 10 serial ports.
Try that with a traditional PLC!! There isn’t a
better way to combine serial data with I/O
control. Unlike most RLL programming, the
Think & Do PC control software is designed
for easy communication programming and
string data manipulation.
Up to 10 serial ports
PLC-style I/O
Connect to our C-more
or C-more micro operator panels
A WinPLC can use any of the standard
DL205 discrete and analog I/O modules,
up to 256 I/O in the local base, and
more when using the H2-ERM to master
an additional base. Modules in the local
base allow the WinPLC direct backplane
access to those I/O.
Connect to our
Industrial Modem*
*Note: Serial modems for communication (see Communications Products section). WinPLCs are programmed via the Ethernet port
e5–18
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
High performance
counting module with
pulse output
Our high-speed counter module
(H2-CTRIO) has four independently
configurable timer/counter
channels (up to 100 kHz) and two pulse
output generators (up to 25 kHz). The easyto-use configuration tool is included For
more details, see the H2-CTRIO pages in
this section.
Advanced programming
environment
Develop your project with the leader in PC
control software, using Think & Do Live! or
Think & Do Studio. Enjoy the powerful
features of Think & Do to develop applications for the WinPLC. See the PC Control in
the Software section of this catalog for details
on Think & Do’s intuitive flowchart programming software.
WinPLC CPU Module
For both Think & Do Studio and Think & Do Live!
WPLC
Memory
H2-WPLC3-EN
8 MB ROM/8 MB RAM
Company
Info.
PLCs
Field I/O
(100MHz)
Software
C-more &
other HMI
For qualified OEMs or software developers, the WinPLC comes in a CE-only
version for VisualBasic and C++
programmers developing custom code.
If you are interested in the CE-only
version, visit www.hosteng.com for details.
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
DL205 I/O with Ethernet base controller
or
Terminator I/O with Ethernet base controller
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
or
AutomationDirect’s
Industrial Ethernet Switch (E-SW05U) for reliable, deterministic
communications in industrial environments.
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Built-in standard
Ethernet connectivity
The WinPLC has an integrated 10 MB
Ethernet port. Use OPC or DDE to link
WinPLC’s with an HMI or other
application. Or, share tags with any PC or
WinPLC running Think & Do software.
WinPLCs are compatible with the new
DataWorx data acquisition software. See
the software catalog section.
Relays/
Timers
DL405 I/O with Ethernet base controller
Power
Circuit
Protection
Up to business LAN
(Network traffic from business LAN
restricted by managed switch)
Distributed I/O
Enclosures
Control an expansion base of I/O with an
H2-ERM (Ethernet Remote Master) in the
local base connected to Ethernet Base
Controllers (EBC), for slave I/O in your
choice of DL205, DL405 or Terminator I/O.
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–19
Company
Info.
7 Steps to Specifying a DL205 System
The following 7 steps will help you specify a DL205 PLC system. They
are also covered in more detail on the pages that follow. Your first
priority when designing a system should be safety. Please make sure
that all of the components in your system will operate within the
product’s environmental and operating specifications. This catalog is
intended to provide abbreviated product descriptions, benefits and
prices. It is not intended to be a substitute for the product manuals.
PLCs
Field I/O
Before you begin selecting products for your DL205 PLC
system, be sure to evaluate all of your application needs
and any future growth potential.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Review the DL205
family of products
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
The DL205 family offers a wide variety of
products. Please review the product offering
starting on page 5–23.
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Select a CPU,
programming tool
and cable
Encoders
Current
Sensors
The DL205 family offers four traditional
CPUs: the D2-260, D2-250-1, D2-240
and D2-230. The WinPLC, a Windows®
CE-based CPU, is also covered in this
step. Please take the time to understand
the features and specifications of each
CPU model (i.e. built-in communications
ports protocols, instructions, etc.).
Pressure
Sensors
To program the DL205 CPUs, choose
between the Windows-based DirectSOFT
programming software and PC cable or
handheld programmer. The WinPLC
requires Think & Do Studio or Think & Do
Live! for programming. CPU-slot slave
base controllers are also introduced in this
step.
Relays/
Timers
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Additional
communications
ports needed?
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
If your application requires more than the
built-in CPU communications ports, then
select the H2-ECOM(100) Ethernet communications module, or the D2-DCM serial
communications module. These modules
add more ports for networking or connection to an HMI, etc. The H2-SERIO serial
communications module can be used with
the WinPLC to add more communications
ports.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Appendix
Part Index
PLC Products
e5–21
7 Steps to Specifying a DL205 System
Select the discrete,
analog and
specialty I/O
modules
Since there are several different types of
I/O and specialty modules available for
the DL205 system, it is important to review
the module specifications in detail when
selecting them for your system. The hardware specifications for the modules are
described at the end of the DL205 section,
starting with the specialty modules and
followed by the discrete and analog I/O
modules.
Choose an I/O
configuration
method
The DL205 offers several configurations of
I/O. Choose among local I/O, local
expansion I/O and remote I/O. A DL205
system can be developed using a combination of the configuration arrangements.
It is important to understand the octal
addressing scheme and I/O module
placement restrictions that are described
in this step.
Example: nsion I/O
Local expa
Check the
power budget
It is very important to verify that the
selected CPU and I/O modules will
operate within the base power budget.
Tables list the power supplied and
consumed by each DL205 device. This
step also describes base dimensions and
mounting requirements.
Place your order!
Place your order either online at
www.automationdirect.com, by calling 1800-633-0405 or by faxing your order to
1-770-889-7876. See the Ordering
section in this catalog for details.
e5–22
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
Step 1: Review the DL205 Product Family
CPUs
D2-260 – 30.4K words total memory
2 communications ports
16 built-in PID loops with auto-tuning
D2-250-1 – 14.8K words total memory
2 communications ports
4 built-in PID loops with auto-tuning
D2-240 – 3.8K total memory
2 communications ports
D2-230 – 2.4K total memory
1 communications port
Windows CE CPUs WinPLC (H2-WPLC*-**)
Programming tools
DirectSOFT Programming Software for
Windows Handheld Programmer (D2-HPP)
Bases
3-slot base (includes power supply)
110/220 VAC (D2-03B-1)
12/24 VDC (D2-03BDC1-1)
4-slot base (includes power supply)
110/220 VAC (D2-04B-1)
12/24 VDC (D2-04BDC1-1)
6-slot base (includes power supply)
110/220 VAC (D2-06B-1)
12/24 VDC (D2-06BDC1-1)
125 VDC (D2-06BDC2-1)
9-slot base (includes power supply)
110/220 VAC (D2-09B-1)
12/24 VDC (D2-09BDC1-1)
125 VDC (D2-09BDC2-1)
Local expansion
modules
(D2-250-1 or D2-260 using D2-0*B-1 or
D2-0*BDC*-1 only)
Base expansion module (D2-EM)
Expansion base controller module
(D2-CM)
Expansion base cable (D2-EXCBL-1)
Discrete
input modules
DC input
8-pt. 12-24 VDC sink/source
(D2-08ND3)
16-pt. 24 VDC sink/source
(D2-16ND3)
32-pt. 24 VDC sink/source
(D2-32ND3)
32-pt. 5-12 VDC sink/source
(D2-32ND3-2)
(Discrete inputs continued next column)
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC input
8-pt. 110 VAC (D2-08NA-1)
16-pt. 110 VAC (D2-16NA)
8-pt. 220 VAC (D2-08NA-2)
Discrete
output modules
DC output
4-pt. 12-24 VDC sink (D2-04TD1)
8-pt. 12-24 VDC sink (D2-08TD1)
8-pt. 12-24 VDC source (D2-08TD2)
16-pt. 12-24 VDC sink (D2-16TD1-2)
16-pt. 12-24 VDC source (D2-16TD2-2)
16-pt. 24 VDC sink (Fault protected)
(F2-16TD1P)
16-pt. 24 VDC source (Fault protected)
(F2-16TD2P)
32-pt. 12-24 VDC sink (D2-32TD1)
32-pt. 12-24 VDC source (D2-32TD2)
AC output
8-pt. 18-220 VAC (D2-08TA)
8-pt. 20-125 VAC (F2-08TA)
12-pt. 18-110 VAC (D2-12TA)
Relay output
4-pt. 4A/pt (Isolated) (D2-04TRS)
8-pt. 1A/pt (D2-08TR)
8-pt. 10A/pt. (F2-08TR)
8-pt. 7A/pt (Isolated) (F2-08TRS)
12-pt. 1.5A/pt (D2-12TR)
Combination
discrete modules
4-pt. 24 VDC in/4pt Relay Out (D2-08CDR)
Analog modules
Analog input
4-ch. in, 12 bit, current (F2-04AD-1)
4-ch. in, 12 bit, voltage (F2-04AD-2)
8-ch. in, 12 bit, current (F2-08AD-1)
8-ch. in, 12 bit, voltage (F2-08AD-2)
Analog output
2-ch. out, 12 bit, current (F2-02DA-1)
2-ch. out, 16 bit, current (Isolated)
(F2-02DAS-1)
2-ch. out, 12 bit, voltage (F2-02DA-2)
2 -ch. out, 16 bit, voltage (Isolated)
(F2-02DAS-2)
8-ch. out, 12 bit, current (F2-08DA-1)
8-ch. out, 12 bit, voltage (F2-08DA-2)
Combination analog in/out
4-ch. in/2-ch. out, 12 bit, current
(F2-4AD2DA)
8-ch. in/4-ch. out, 16 bit, current
(F2-8AD4DA-1)
8-ch. in/4-ch. out, 16 bit, voltage
(F2-8AD4DA-2)
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Temperature input
4-ch. in, RTD (F2-04RTD)
4-ch. in, Thermocouple (F2-04THM)
Communications/
networking modules
Ethernet Communications Module
(H2-ECOM (-F))
(H2-ECOM 100)
Data Communications Module
(D2-DCM)
Remote I/O modules
Ethernet
Ethernet Remote Master Module
(H2-ERM(-F))
Ethernet Base Controller (slave)
(H2-EBC(-F))
(H2-EBC 100)
Serial
Remote Master Module (D2-RMSM)
Remote Slave Module (D2-RSSS)
Specialty modules
Basic CoProcessor (F2-CP128)
8-pt. Input Simulator (F2-08SIM)
Counter I/O (H2-CTRIO)
Counter Interface (D2-CTRINT)
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
CPU-slot
slave controllers
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Ethernet Base Controller (H2-EBC)
DeviceNet Slave (F2-DEVNETS-1)
Profibus Slave (H2-PBC)
SDS Slave (F2-SDS-1)
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Operator interface
See the C-more and HMI sections in this
catalog for a complete line of compatible
text and touch panels and configuration
software.
Connection systems
See the Terminal Blocks and Wiring
Solutions section in this catalog for information on DINnector terminal blocks,
ZIPLink connection systems and other
connection accessories for use with the
DL205 system.
PLC Products
e5–23
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
HERE
Step 2: Select the CPU, Programmer and Cable
There are many things to consider when
choosing a CPU, most of which depend
on your particular application. The facing
page provides a comparison between the
CPUs. This section provides a quick
summary of the key features for each CPU.
System capacity
System capacity is the ability of the CPU to
accommodate a variety of applications.
Consider both ladder memory and data
registers (V-memory). For ladder memory,
most Boolean instructions require one
word. Some other instructions, such as
timers, counters, etc. require two or more
words.
Our V-memory locations are 16-bit words
and are useful for data storage, etc.
If you think you may exceed 256 local I/O
points, then select the D2-250-1 or the
D2-260 CPU which support local expansion of up to two or four additional bases,
respectively.
The D2-240, D2-250-1 and D2-260
support the Ethernet and serial Remote
Master module that are used to build a
remote I/O network. Port 2 on the
D2-250-1 and D2-260 can also serve as
a remote I/O master.
Performance
If you are using basic Boolean instructions
and speed is not the primary concern,
then the D2-230 or D2-240 will do the
job. For applications that require fast scan
times, additional communications or
advanced instructions, choose the
D2-250-1 or D2-260 CPU. The D2-260
is our fastest CPU for performing even the
most basic of math or data instructions,
and will provide better overall performance than the other DL205 CPUs.
Programming
and diagnostics
Our CPUs offer an incredible array of
instructions and diagnostic features that
can save you many hours of programming
and debug time. From basic Boolean
contact logic to PID and floating point
math, we have it covered! The table on
the next page covers some of the basic
instruction categories, but for more
details, see our complete list of instructions
at the end of this section. If you already
have DirectSOFT and/or a Handheld
Programmer, you may have to upgrade
the software/firmware to accommodate
the D2-260.
Built-in CPU
communications
Every DL205 CPU provides at least one
built-in RS-232 communication port. If
you’re using an operator interface, then
you should choose the D2-240,
D2-250-1 or D2-260 CPU. The D2-240,
D2-250-1 and D2-260 CPUs offer two
built-in communication ports. The D2-240
supports our DirectNET™ slave protocol
on the bottom port, which provides a
quick and easy network connection to any
DirectNET master. If you need the most
flexibility possible, then consider the
D2-250-1 or D2-260 CPU. These CPUs
offer built-in DirectNET slave support
capability on the top and bottom ports,
and DirectNet/Modbus RTU master/slave
support on the bottom. The bottom port
supports baud rates up to 38.4K baud.
The D2-260 provides support for ASCII
IN/OUT communications.
If you require more than two ports, we also
offer an Ethernet Communications
Module that can be used to quickly add a
communication port to a DL205 system
with a D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260
CPU. The D2-DCM module can also be
added to these CPUs to provide an additional serial communications port.
DL 205 family CPUs
D2-260
D2-250-1
D2-240
D2-230
H2-WPLC*-**
The WinPLC brings PLC
and PC technologies together
by providing a Windows CE
operating system environment
for DL205 hardware. See the
WinPLC pages later in this
section for details on the
WinPLC.
e5–24
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
DL205 CPU Specifications
PLCs
Field I/O
DL205 CPU Comparison
Software
System Capacity
D2-230
D2-240
D2-250-1
D2-260
C-more &
other HMI
Total memory available (words)
Ladder memory (words)
V-memory (words)
Battery backup
Total CPU memory I/O pts. available (actual I/O pts.
2.4K
2048 EEPROM
256
Yes
256
3.8K
2560 EEPROM
1024
Yes
896
14.8K
7680 Flash
7168
Yes
2048
30.4
15872 Flash
14592
Yes
8192 (1024 X + 1024 Y +
AC Drives
(512 X + 512 Y + 1024 CR)
2048 CR + 2048 GX + 2048 GY)
256
768 (2 exp. bases max)
(Including local I/O)
2048 max.
(Including local and exp.I/O)
8 (7+1 CPU port)
2048
Yes
2048 max.
(Including local and exp.I/O)
Map into V-memory
256
1280 (4 exp. bases max.)
(Including local I/O)
8192 max.
(Including local & exp. I/O)
8 (7+1 CPU port)
2048
Yes
8192
(Including local and exp.I/O)
Map into V-memory
Limited by power budget
depend on I/O configuration method selected)
(320 X + 320 Y + 256 CR)
Local I/O (pts.)
Local Expansion I/O (pts.)
256
none
256
none
Serial Remote I/O (pts.)
N/A
Remote I/O channels
I/O per remote channel
Ethernet Remote I/O
Discrete I/O pts.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Analog I/O channels
Remote I/O channels
I/O per remote channel
N/A
N/A
N/A
896 max.
(Including local I/O)
2
2048 (limited to 896)
Yes
896 max.
(Including local I/O)
Map into V-memory
Limited by power budget
16,384 (limited to 896)
Limited by power budget
16,384 (16 fully expanded
H4-EBC slaves using V-memory
and bit-of-word instructions)
H4-EBC slaves using V-memory
and bit-of-word instructions)
3.3µs
4-6ms
1.4µs
10-12ms
0.61µs
1.9ms
0.61µs
1.9ms
K-sequence (proprietary protocol)
DirectNET™
Modbus RTU master/slave
ASCII communications
Maximum baud rate
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Yes
Yes/256
Yes
No
Variable
113
256
64
64
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes/512
Yes
Yes
Variable
129
256
128
128
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-level
No
Yes
Yes/1024
Yes
Yes
Variable
174
1024
256
128
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes, 4 loops
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-level
Yes
Yes
Yes/1024
Yes
Yes
Variable
231
2048
256
256
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes, 16 loops
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-level
Yes
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Communications
Built-in ports
Steppers/
Servos
Encoders
Programming and Diagnostics
RLL Ladder Style
RLLPLUS/Flowchart Style (Stages)
Run time editing
Supports Overrides
Variable/fixed scan
Instructions
Control relays
Timers
Counters
Immediate I/O
Subroutines
For/Next loops
Timed Interrupt
Integer Math
Floating-point Math
Trigonometric functions
Table Instructions
PID
Drum Sequencers
Bit of Word
ASCII Print
Real-time clock/calender
Internal diagnostics
Password security
System and user error log
Power
Transmiss.
16,384 (16 fully expanded
Performance
Contact execution (Boolean)
Typical scan (1K Boolean)
AC Motors
Port 1 RS-232
Yes
No
No
No
9600
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Port 1 RS-232 and
Port 2 RS-232
Yes
Yes
No
No
19.2K port 2
Port 1 RS-232 and
Port 2 RS-232/422
Yes
Yes
Yes
OUT
38.4K port 2
Port 1 RS-232 and
Port 2 RS-232/422/485)
Yes
Yes
Yes
IN/OUT
38.4K port 2
PLC Products
e5–25
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
HERE
D2-260 Key Features
D2-260 can serve as network master
Easily connect programming devices or HMI to CPU ports
D2-260 CPU
D2-260
<--->
0
MODBUS® RTU or DirectNET™ network protocol
Use port 2 on D2-260 or
D2-250-1 to network slaves
Connect operator interfaces to port 1 on the slaves
D2-260: Our most
powerful DL205 CPU
Our D2-260 CPU provides all the capabilities of the other DL205 CPUs (as well
as our D4-450 CPU), plus several additional features rarely found in a PLC of this
size. With such an incredible array of
features, you may be able to replace PLCs
costing hundreds (or thousands) more.
Release 4.0 or higher of DirectSOFT is
required to program the D2-260. If you’re
using a handheld programmer, version
2.10 of the handheld programmer
firmware is required. Here are a few key
features about the D2-260 CPU:
Local expansion I/O
The D2-260 supports local expansion up to
five total bases (one CPU base and four
expansion bases). Expansion bases are
commonly used when there are not enough
slots available in the CPU base, when the
base power budget will be exceeded, or
when placing an I/O base at a location
away from the CPU base ( but within the
expansion cable limits). All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU
scan. Each local expansion base requires
the D2-CM module in the CPU slot. The
local CPU base requires the D2-EM
Expansion Module, as well as each expansion base. For more information on local
expansion, refer to the Expansion Modules
pages later in this section.
Use D2-DCM module if D2-240
is slave or if D2-250-1/D2-260
port 2 is occupied
Powerful built-in
CPU communications
16 PID loops
with auto-tuning
The D2-260 offers two communications
ports that provide a vast array of communication possibilities. The top RJ-12
RS-232 port can be used for connection to
a C-more or DV-1000 operator interface
panel, or as a single K-sequence or
DirectNET slave. The 15-pin bottom port
(port 2) supports RS-232 or RS422/RS485. This port offers several
different protocol options such as:
• K-sequence
• DirectNET Master/Slave
• Modbus RTU Master/Slave
• ASCII In/Out Communications
Port 2 can also serve as a remote I/O
master. The D2-260 supports the Ethernet
Communication module and Data
Communication Module for additional
communications ports.
The D2-260 CPU can process up to 16
PID loops directly in the CPU. You can
select from various control modes
including automatic, manual, and
cascade. There are also a wide variety of
alarms including Process Variable, Rate of
Change, and Deviation. The loop operation parameters (Process Variable,
Setpoint, Setpoint Limits, etc.) are stored in
V-memory, which allows easy access from
operator interfaces or HMIs. Setup is
accomplished with easy-to-use setup
menus and monitoring views in
DirectSOFT programming.
The auto-tuning feature is easy to use and
can reduce setup and maintenance time.
Basically, the CPU uses the auto- tuning
feature to automatically determine near
optimum loop settings. See the D2-250-1
CPU section for a PID loop control block
diagram.
D2-260 local expansion system
Note: All bases in the system must be (-1) bases.
D2-EXCBL-1
(Category 5
straight-through
cable with RJ45
connectors)
D2-EM
D2-260
D2-CM
D2-EM
D2-EM
D2-CM
The D2-260 offers:
• Up to four expansion bases
• Up to 1,024 inputs and 1,024 outputs
• Up to 30m (98 ft.) total expansion system cable
e5–26
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
D2-260 Key Features
PLCs
Field I/O
CPU Status Indicators
Full array of
instructions
The right instruction can greatly simplify
your programming task and can save
hours of programming time.
The D2-260 supports over 280 powerful
instructions, such as:
• Four types of drum sequencers
• Leading / trailing edge triggered oneshots
• Bit-of-word manipulation
• Floating point conversions
• Trigonometric functions
• Table instructions
• ASCII IN/OUT instructions
For a complete list of instructions
supported by all DL205 CPUs, see the
end of this section.
Modbus RTU
instructions
The D2-260 CPU supports easy-to-use
Modbus Read/Write instructions that
expand our existing Modbus network
instruction capabilities. The MRX or MWX
instructions allow you to enter native
Modbus addressing in your ladder
program with no need to perform octalto-decimal conversion. We added
Function codes 05, 06 and the ability to
read Slave Exception Codes. These flexible instructions allow the user to select
the following parameters within one
instruction window:
• 584/984 or 484 Modbus data type
• Slave node (0-247)
• Function code
• Modbus starting master / slave memory
address
• Number of bits
• Exception code starting address
Examples of MRX and MWX
instructions in DirectSOFT
ON
OFF
ON
BATT
OFF
ON
CPU
OFF
ON
PWR
OFF
CPU is in RUN mode
CPU is in PROGRAM mode
Battery backup voltage is low
Battery backup voltage is OK or disabled
CPU internal diagnostics detects error
CPU is OK
CPU power good
CPU power failure
RUN
Puts CPU into RUN mode
Allows peripherals (HPP, Direct SOFT) to
select the mode of operation
Forces CPU out of RUN mode
RUN
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mode Switch
TERM
Port 1 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
STOP
0V
5V
RXD (RS-232)
TXD (RS-232)
5V
0V
11
15
5
Devices
Port 2 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
6
1
Port 1
Protocols
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5VDC
TXD2 (RS-232)
RXD2 (RS-232)
RTS2 (RS-232)
CTS2 (RS-232)
RXD2- (RS-422/485)
0VDC
0VDC
TXD2+ (RS-422/485)
TXD2- (RS-422/485)
RTS2+ (RS-422/485)
RTS2- (RS-422/485)
RXD2- (RS-422/485)
CTS2+ (RS-422/485)
CTS2- (RS-422/485)
Specs.
6P6C phone jack connector RS-232
9,600 baud
Fixed address
Odd parity only
8 data bits one start, one stop
asynchronous, half-duplex, DTE
Protocols
K-sequence slave, DirectNET
Master/Slave, Modbus RTU Master/Slave,
ASCII IN/OUT,
Remote I/O Master
Devices
Can connect w/many devices, such as
PCs running DirectSOFT, DSData, HMI
packages, C-more, DV-1000, other O/I
panels, any DirectNET or Modbus RTU
master or slave, or ASCII devices
Specs.
HD15 connector
RS-232, RS-422/485*
300/600/1200/2400/4800
9600/19.2K/38.4K baud
Odd, even, or no parity
Selectable address
(1-90, HEX 1 – 5A)
8 data bits, one start, one stop
Asynchronous,
Half-duplex, DTE
ZIPLink cables and communications
adapter modules offer fast and convenient screw terminal connection for the
bottom port of the D2-260
CPU. The adapter modules
are
RS232/422/485
compatible and are offered
with or without indicating
LEDs and surge protection.
See the Terminal Blocks and
Wiring Solutions section in this catalog for
more information.
ZL-CMA15L
shown
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Battery (Optional)
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Coin type, 3.0V Lithium battery, 560mA,
battery number CR2354
Power
Note: Batteries are not needed for program backup. However, you
should order a battery if you have parameters in V-memory that must be
maintained in case of a power outage.
*RS485 for Modbus protocol only
ZIPLink
communications
adapter modules
C-more &
other HMI
Port 2
D2-BAT-1
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
K-sequence slave, DirectNET™ slave,
Modbus RTU slave
Can connect w/HPP, DirectSOFT, C-more,
DV-1000, O/I panels, or any DirectNET
master
Software
Circuit
Protection
On-board memory
Enclosures
The D2-260 has 15.5K words of flash
memory on board for your program plus
14.2K words of data registers. With flash
memory, you don’t have to worry about
losing the program due to a bad battery.
Tools
Built-in remote
I/O connection
The bottom port on the D2-260 can be
used as a master for serial remote I/O
networks (see the D2-RSSS later in this
section for details).
PLC Products
e5–27
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
HERE
D2-260 Key Features
ASCII
communications
instructions
The D2-260 CPU supports several
easy-to-use instructions that allow ASCII
strings to be read into and written from
the PLC communications ports.
Raw ASCII: Port 2 can be used for either
reading or writing raw ASCII strings, but
not for both.
Embedded ASCII characters: The D2-260
can decipher ASCII embedded within
a supported protocol (K-Sequence,
DirectNet, Modbus, Ethernet) via the CPU
ports, H2-ECOM or D2-DCM.
Here's how the D2-260 can
receive ASCII input strings:
1. ASCII IN (AIN) - This instruction configures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings
with parameters such as fixed and variable length ASCII strings, termination
characters, byte swapping options, and
instruction control bits. Use barcode
scanners, weight scales, etc. to write
raw ASCII input strings into port 2
based on the (AIN) instruction’s parameters.
2. Write embedded ASCII strings
directly to V-memory from an
external HMI or similar master
device via a supported communications protocol using the CPU ports,
H2-ECOM or D2-DCM. The AIN
instruction is not used in this case.
3. If a D2-260 PLC is a master on a
network, the Network Read instruction
(RX) can be used to read embedded
ASCII data from a slave device via a
supported communications protocol
using port 2, H2-ECOM or D2-DCM.
The RX instruction places the data
directly into V-memory.
e5–28
PLC Products
Here's how the D2-260 can write
ASCII output strings:
Additional instructions that help
manage the ASCII strings
1. Print from V-memory (PRINTV) - Use
this instruction to write raw ASCII strings
out of port 2 to a display panel or a
serial printer, etc. The instruction
features the starting V-memory address,
string length, byte swapping options,
etc. When the instruction's permissive
bit is enabled, the string is written to
port 2.
The following instructions can be very
helpful in managing the ASCII strings
within the CPU’s V-memory:
2. Print to V-memory (VPRINT) - Use this
instruction to create pre-coded ASCII
strings in the PLC (i.e. alarm
messages). When the instruction's
permissive bit is enabled, the message
is loaded into a pre-defined V-memory
address location. Then the (PRINTV)
instruction may be used to write the
pre-coded ASCII string out of port
2. American, European and Asian
Time/Date stamps are supported.
3. Print Message (PRINT) - This existing
instruction can be used to create precoded ASCII strings in the PLC. When
the instruction's permissive bit is
enabled, the string is written to port 2.
The VPRINT/PRINTV instruction combination is more powerful and flexible
than the PRINT instruction.
4. If a D2-260 PLC is a master on a
network, the Network Write instruction
(WX) can be used to write embedded
ASCII data to an HMI or slave device
directly from V-memory via a supported
communications protocol using port 2,
H2-ECOM or D2-DCM.
ASCII Find (AFIND) - Finds where a
specific portion of the ASCII string
is located in continuous V-memory
addresses. Forward and reverse searches
are supported.
ASCII Extract (AEX) - Extracts a specific
portion (usually some data value) from the
ASCII find location or other known ASCII
data location.
Compare V-memory (CMPV) - This
instruction is used to compare two blocks
of V-memory addresses and is usually
used to detect a change in an ASCII
string. Compared data types must be of
the same format (i.e. BCD, ASCII, etc.).
Swap Bytes (SWAPB) - Usually used to
swap V-memory bytes on ASCII data that
was written directly to V-memory from an
external HMI or similar master device via
a communications protocol. The AIN and
AEX instructions have a built-in byte swap
feature.
Example of VPRINT instruction
in DirectSOFT
Example AIN instructionin
DirectSOFT
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
D2-250-1 Key Features
D2-250-1 can serve as network master
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
Easily connect programming devices or HMI to CPU ports
D2-250-1 CPU
D2-250-1
C-more &
other HMI
<--->
AC Drives
0
AC Motors
DirectNET™ or MODBUS® RTU network
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Connect operator interfaces to port 1 on the slaves
D2-250-1 replaces
D2-250
Our D2-250-1 CPU replaces the D2250 CPU. The D2-250-1 offers all the
features and functionality of the D2-250
with the addition of local I/O expansion
capability. The D2-250-1 offers an
incredible array of features for a CPU
that costs so little.
Release 2.1 or higher of DirectSOFT is
required to program the D2-250-1.
Release 4.0 or higher is required if you
intend to use local expansion I/O.
If you’re using a handheld programmer,
at least version 2.10 of the handheld
programmer firmware is required.
A few key features of the D2-250-1 CPU
follow.
Local expansion I/O
The D2-250-1 supports local expansion
up to three total bases (one CPU base and
two expansion bases). Expansion bases
are commonly used when there are not
enough slots available in the CPU base,
when the base power budget will be
exceeded or when placing an I/O base at
a location away from the CPU base, but
within the expansion cable limits. All local
and expansion I/O points are updated on
every CPU scan. Each local expansion
base requires the D2-CM module in the
CPU slot. The local CPU base requires
the D2-EM Expansion Module, as well as
each expansion base. For more information on local expansion, refer to the
Expansion Modules pages later in this
section.
Use D2-DCM module if D2-240
is slave or if D2-250-1/D2-260
port 2 is occupied
Use port 2 on D2-260 or
D2-250-1 to network slaves
Powerful built-in
CPU communications
Four PID
loops with
auto-tuning
The D2-250-1 offers two communication
ports that provide a vast array of communication possibilities. The top RS-232
port is for programming, connection to a
C-more operator interface panel or
DV-1000, or to serve as a single
DirectNET slave. The 15-pin bottom port
(port 2) supports RS-232 or RS-422. This
port offers several different protocol
options such as:
• K-sequence
• DirectNET master/slave
• Modbus RTU master/slave
Port 2 can also serve as a remote I/O
master. The D2-250 supports the
Ethernet Communication Module and
Data Communication Module for additional communications ports.
D2-CM
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
The D2-250-1 CPU can process up to 4
PID loops directly in the CPU. You can
select from various control modes
including automatic, manual, and
cascade control. There are a wide variety
of alarms including Process Variable,
Rate of Change, and Deviation. The loop
operation parameters (Process Variable,
Setpoint, Setpoint Limits, etc.) are stored
in V-memory, which allows easy access
from operator interfaces or HMIs. Setup
is accomplished with easy-to-use setup
menus and monitoring views in
DirectSOFT programming.
Encoders
The auto-tuning feature is easy to use
and can reduce setup and maintenance
time. Basically, the CPU uses the autotuning feature to automatically determine
near optimum loop settings. See the next
page for a PID loop control block
diagram.
Comm.
D2-250-1 local expansion system
Note: All bases in the system must be (-1) bases.
Motor
Controls
The D2-250-1 offers:
• up to two expansion bases
• up to 768 physical I/O points
• up to 30m (98 ft.) total expansion system
D2-EM
cable
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
D2-CM
D2-EM
D2-EM
D2-250-1
CPU
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
D2-EXCBL-1 (Category 5
straight-through cable with
RJ45 connectors)
PLC Products
e5–29
HERE
D2-250-1 Key Features
CPU Status Indicators
Full array of
instructions
The D2-250-1 supports over 210
powerful instructions, such as:
• Four types of drum sequencers
• Leading and trailing edge triggered oneshots
• Bit-of-word manipulation
• Floating point conversions
• Four PID loops
For a complete list of instructions
supported by all DL205 CPUs, see the end
of this section.
DL250-1
CPU
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPU is in RUN mode
CPU is in PROGRAM mode
Battery backup voltage is low
Battery backup voltage is OK or disabled
CPU internal diagnostics detects error
CPU is OK
CPU power good
CPU power failure
RUN
Puts CPU into RUN mode
Allows peripherals (HPP, Direct SOFT) to
select the mode of operation
Forces CPU out of RUN mode
Mode Switch
Port 1 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
TERM
1
2
3
4
5
6
STOP
0V
5V
RXD (RS-232)
TXD (RS-232)
5V
0V
Port 1
Protocols
Port 2 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
On-board memory
The D2-250-1 has 7.6K words of flash
memory on board for your program plus
7.1K words of V-memory (data registers).
With flash memory, you don’t have to
worry about losing the program due to a
bad battery. If you have critical data stored
in the capacitor backed V-memory, simply
purchase the optional lithium battery
(D2-BAT-1) to permanently maintain these
parameters.
ON
OFF
ON
BATT
OFF
ON
CPU
OFF
ON
PWR
OFF
RUN
6
11
1
15
5
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Devices
5VDC
TXD2 (RS-232)
RXD2 (RS-232)
RTS2 (RS-232)
CTS2 (RS-232)
RXD2- (RS-422)
0VDC
0VDC
TXD2+ (RS-422)
TXD2- (RS-422)
RTS2+ (RS-422)
RTS2- (RS-422)
RXD2- (RS-422)
CTS2+ (RS-422)
CTS2- (RS-422)
Specs.
Port 2
Protocols
Devices
Built-in remote
I/O connection
In addition to providing outstanding
communications capabilities, the bottom
port on the D2-250-1 can also be a
master for remote I/O networks. If you
need extra I/O at a remote distance from
the CPU, you can use this port to add up
to seven of our remote slave stations (see
the D2-RSSS for additional information
later in this section.)
Specs.
e5–30
PLC Products
K-sequence slave, DirectNET
Master/Slave, Modbus RTU Master/Slave,
ASCII OUT,
Remote I/O Master
Can connect w/many devices, such as
PCs running DirectSOFT, DSData, HMI
packages, C-more, DV-1000, other O/I
panels, any DirectNET or Modbus RTU
master or slave, or ASCII devices
HD15 connector
RS-232/422
300/600/1200/2400/4800
9600/19.2 K/38.4 Kbaud
Odd, even, or no parity
Selectable address
(1-90, HEX 1 – 5A)
8 data bits, one start, one stop
Asynchronous,
Half-duplex, DTE
Battery (Optional)
Coin type, 3.0 V Lithium battery, 560 mA,
battery number CR2354
Note: Batteries are not needed for program backup. However, you should order a battery if you
have parameters in V-memory that must be maintained in case of a power outage.
D2-BAT-1
ZIPLink
communications adapter
modules
ZIPLink cables and communications
adapter modules offer fast and convenient screw terminal connection for the
bottom port of the D2-250-1
CPU. The adapter modules
are RS232/422 DIP switch
selectable and are offered
with or without indicating
LEDs and surge protection.
See the Terminal Blocks and
Wiring Solutions section in this ZL-CMA15L
catalog for more information. shown
K-sequence slave, DirectNET™ slave,
Modbus RTU slave
Can connect w/HPP, DirectSOFT, C-more,
DV-1000, O/I panels, or any DirectNET
master
6P6C phone jack connector RS-232
9,600 baud
Fixed address
Odd parity only
8 data bits one start, one stop
asynchronous, half-duplex, DTE
DL205 analog output or
discrete output module
C-more, DV–1000,
or other OI Units
Control
Equation
Setpoint
Value
Control
Output
Control
Element
Proces s
(heater , etc.)
(valve, etc.)
PID loop control block diagram
DL205 Analog or
Temperature
Input Modules
Proces s
Variable
Input
Proces s
Variable
Sensor
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
D2-230/240 Key Features
D2-240 CPU
D2-240
<--->
PLCs
Field I/O
for programming, to our handheld
programmer, C-more, or to the DV-1000.
The bottom port is a slave-only port and
supports our DirectNET™ or K-sequence
protocol at speeds up to 19.2 Kbaud. If
you’re using an operator interface or if
you plan on connecting the system to a
network later on, then you can choose
the D2-240. The D2-240 also supports
the D2-DCM Data Communication
Module and the H2-ECOM Ethernet
Communication Modules.
Software
D2-230 CPU
D2-230
<--->
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
DL205 spare
EEPROM chips
D2-240: for basic
applications
The D2-240 provides a subset of the
D2-250-1’s capabilities. If you need a
good CPU with multiple communications
ports, and complex math or PID isn’t
required, then the D2-240 is the CPU for
you!
Built-in memory
Proximity
Sensors
There may be cases where you want to
have a spare EEPROM chip available.
For example, maybe you need to
upgrade a customer’s machine with your
latest enhancements. You can purchase
extra EEPROM chips (two per pack).
These can be installed in the CPU (D2230/D2-240 only) and programmed, or
they can be programmed directly with the
DL205 handheld programmer.
The D2-230 is our most economical CPU
in the DL205 product family. If you are
looking at the DL205 primarily because
of the size, or for other reasons that don’t
require lots of CPU horsepower, then give
the D2-230 a try.
Built-in
EEPROM memory
CPU Side View
There is 2.5K of EEPROM program
memory in the D2-240. No additional
memory is required.
If you have critical data stored in the
capacitor backed V-memory, simply
purchase the optional lithium battery
(D2-BAT) to permanently maintain these
parameters as well.
D2-230: our lowest
price DL205 CPU
Write Protect
Jumper
E E PROM
EEPROM location
EEPROM
D2-EE-1
D2-EE-2
Powerful instructions
CPU
D2-230
D2-240
The D2-240 instructions cover most of
the capability of our more powerful
D2-250-1, and allow you to cover a
wide variety of applications. Instructions
include Boolean logic, data manipulation, integer math, interrupts, subroutines, FOR/NEXT loops, etc. For a
complete list of instructions, see the back
of this section.
CPU Program
2.0K
Storage Capacity
2.4K
Writing Cycle
Life
10,000
10,000
Write Inhibit
CPU jumper
CPU jumper
Memory Clear
Method
Electrical
Electrical
Two built-in RS-232
communications ports
The D2-240 offers two communication
ports. The top port can be used for a
direct connection to a personal computer
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
There is 2.0K of EEPROM program
memory in the D2-230. No additional
memory is required.
If you have critical data stored in the
capacitor-backed V-memory, simply
purchase the optional lithium battery
(D2-BAT) to permanently maintain these
parameters as well.
One built-in
communications port
The D2-230 has only one communication port. If you are considering any
network connections in the future, you
will need the D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2260 CPU. The extra port may be worth
the cost, especially during machine
startup or troubleshooting sessions. The
D2-230 does not support the Ethernet or
Data Communications modules.
Basic instruction set
The D2-230 provides a subset of the
D2-240’s well-rounded instructions. The
D2-230’s instructions cover basic
Boolean and simple integer math.
PLC Products
e5–31
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
HERE
D2-230/240 Key Features
The diagram to the right shows the various
hardware features found on the D2-230
and D2-240 CPUs.
LED indicators
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU
DL230
ON
OFF
ON
BATT
OFF
ON
CPU
OFF
ON
PWR
OFF
RUN
TERM
RS-232
communication port
DirectSOFT
Operator interface
Devices
Specs.
Port 2 (D2-240 only)
Protocols
K-sequence slave, DirectNET slave
Devices
Can connect w/many devices, such as
PCs running DirectSOFT, DSData, HMI
packages, C-more, DV-1000, or any
DirectNET master
Specs.
6P6C phone jack connector
300/600/1200/2400/4800
9600/19.2k baud
Odd or no parity
Selectable address (1-90, HEX 1 – 5A)
8 data bits, one start, one stop
Asynchronous, Half-duplex, DTE
TERM
CH3
CH4
PORT 1
RS-232
communication port
DirectSOFT
DirectNET
Operator interface
Puts CPU into RUN mode
Allows peripherals (HPP, Direct SOFT) to
select the mode of operation
K-sequence slave
Can connect w/HPP, DirectSOFT™,
C-more, DV-1000
6P6C phone jack connector RS-232
9,600 baud
Fixed address
Odd parity only
8 data bits, one start, one stop
asynchronous, half-duplex, DTE
RUN
CH2
PORT 1
Port 1
Protocols
CPU
CH1
CPU is in RUN mode
CPU is in PROGRAM mode
Battery backup voltage is low
Battery backup voltage is OK or disabled
CPU internal diagnostics detects error
CPU is OK
CPU power good
CPU power failure
Mode Switch (D2-240 only)
RUN
RUN
CPU
DL240
Analog adjustments
CPU
CPU Status Indicators
PWR
BATT
Mode switch
PORT2
DL230/240
Port 1 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
DL240
Port 2 Pinouts
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD (RS-232)
TXD (RS-232)
5V
0V
0V
5V
RXD (RS-232)
TXD (RS-232)
RTS
0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
Phone jack
connector
CPU side view
PWR
BATT
Optional battery
RUN
CPU
DL240
CPU
RUN
TERM
Turn clockwise to
increase value
CH1
CH2
Analog
Potentiometers
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
EE PROM
PORT 1
PORT2
Battery (Optional)
D2-BAT
CR14250SE
Note: Batteries are not needed for program backup. However, you should order a battery if you
have parameters in V-memory that must be maintained in case of a power outage.
Four external
potentiometers
for adjustments
There are four potentiometers on the face
plate of the D2-240 CPU. They have a
resolution of 256 steps and can be used
to externally adjust four predefined
V-memory locations inside the D2-240
CPU. You specify upper and lower limits
for the values and the CPU takes care of
the rest!
e5–32
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
DL205 Programming Tools and Cables
PLCs
Field I/O
Selecting a
programming device
Software
C-more &
other HMI
There are two tools for programming the
DL205 CPUs: DirectSOFT PC-based
programming software and the D2-HPP
handheld programmer.
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
DirectSOFT
programming software
Steppers/
Servos
Our powerful Windows-based programming package makes it easy for you to
program and monitor your DL205 PLC
system. See the Software section in this
catalog for detailed information on
DirectSOFT.
DirectSoft
Part Number
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Description
PC-DSOFT5
Programs all DirectLOGIC PLC CPUs;
offers IBox intelligent instructions
PC-DS100
Free version of DirectSOFT;
programs all DirectLOGIC PLC CPUs;
limited to 100 word program
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Note: The D2-260 requires DirectSOFT version 4.0 or later
Pressure
Sensors
Pin labeling conforms to IBM DTE and DCE standards
Temp.
Sensors
D2--DSCB L
DL205 programming cables
Choose the proper cable to connect the
DL205 CPU to your PC running DirectSoft.
CPU
D2-230
D2-240
D2-250-1
D2-260
Port
Cable
Only one
D2-DSCBL
Top port
D2-DSCBL
Bottom port
D2-DSCBL
Top port
D2-DSCBL
Bottom port
D2-DSCBL-1
Top port
D2-DSCBL
Bottom port
D2-DSCBL-1
Handheld programmer
Pers onal Computer
2
3
5
1
4
6
7
8
R S 232C
R XD
TXD
GND
DCD
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
D2-230/240/250(-1)/260
CPU Ports
Pushbuttons/
Lights
4 TXD
3 R XD
1 GND
Process
1 2 3 4 5 6
Relays/
Timers
6-pin Phone Plug
(6P6C)
9-pin D--Connector (female)
Comm.
D2--DSCB L --1
Personal Computer
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
D2-250(-1)/260
(bottom port)
R S 232C
2
3
5
1
4
6
7
8
R XD
TXD
GND
DCD
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
Power
2
3
7
4
5
TXD
R XD
GND
RTS
CTS
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
15-pin HD--connector (male)
9-pin D--Connector (female)
The D2-HPP handheld programmer
connects to an RJ12 phone jack port on
any of the DL205 CPUs. The handheld
unit contains a zero force insertion socket
that can be used to store programs on an
optional EEPROM. Can be used with
DL05, DL06, DL105, DL205, and
D3-350 models.
Pneumatics
Appendix
D2-HPP
Handheld programmer,
cable included
(DV-1000CBL)
0
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–33
Part Index
HERE
DL205 WinPLC: Windows® CE-based CPU
Specifications
DL205 WinPLC
H2-WPLC2-EN <--->
H2-WPLC3-EN <--->
PC-WPLC-START*
PC-WPLC-LIVE*
Processor
Processor Speed
Pre-loaded Software
Memory
Indicators
Local I/O Points
Ethernet Remote I/O points
Port 0
PC control
with a WinPLC
The WinPLC provides a Windows® CE operating system environment in our DL205 CPU
hardware. The small size and low cost of
DL205 products is desirable, but the operating systems of the D2-230, 240, 250-1
and 260 CPUs are proprietary (like most
PLCs). The WinPLC provides a hybrid PC-PLC
solution that brings the best of the PLC and
PC control worlds together. A WinPLC system
is the best solution if your applications
requires:
• Complex math
• Heavy serial communications
(can use the H2-SERIO module)
• Advanced data manipulation
• Advanced handling of string or array data
• Up to 64 PID loops
Here’s how it works
The WinPLC module is plugged into the
CPU slot of the DL205 base. It uses
Windows CE, a real-time operating system
combined with the advantages of open
standard software such as OPC, ActiveX
and other Microsoft communications tools.
The WinPLC offers both deterministic
control and open communications. It uses
advanced software development tools for
control, data management, communication and integration with business systems.
The WinPLC supports the following DL205
modules only:
• All discrete and analog modules
• Temperature input modules
• H2-SERIO serial communications module
e5–34
PLC Products
Port 1
I/O Interface
Power Consumption
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Agency Listings
Manufacturer
H2-WPLC2-EN
H2-WPLC3-EN
Hitachi SH3 Series 7708 Processor
100 MHz
Runtime engine compatible with Think & Do Studio or Think & Do Live!
4MB FLASH EE ROM,
2MB RAM,
64kB battery-backed RAM10Mbps
8MB FLASH EE ROM,
8MB RAM,
64kB battery-backed RAM10Mbps
Power, Link/Act, Run, Error
256 (224 if using H2-ERM in module slot for Ethernet remote I/O)
256 (using H2-ERM master in local WinPLC base and H*-EBC or T1H-EBC remote slave
RJ12, 6-pin modular, serial port, supports K-sequence,
or any protocol from Windows CE
RJ45, 8-pin modular, Ethernet 10MBPS
Backplane to DL205 (Up to 9-Slot base), expandable with H2-ERM
• H2-ERM module for Ethernet remote I/O
(limited to one ERM and one EBC slave
per system)
• H2-CTRIO Counter I/O module
DL205 specialty modules not listed above
are not supported by the WinPLC.
Built-in Ethernet port
The WinPLC is programmed via a built-in 10
MB Ethernet port. WinPLCs can use OPC or
DDE to link to an HMI or other application
using this high-speed port; or, share tags with
any controller running Think & Do software
for coordinated control with a PC system. The
built-in Ethernet port can also be used for
peer-to-peer communications between
multiple WinPLCs.
Built-in serial port
A built-in RS-232 serial port lets you connect
a C-more or other operator interfaces to the
WinPLC. You can also connect to devices
such as barcode readers, weight scales or
serial modems to the serial port. Unlike most
RLL programming, the Think & Do programming method is designed for easy communication
programming
and
string
manipulation. Up to nine additional serial
ports can be added to a WinPLC system by
using the H2-SERIO serial communication
module. For more information on the
H2-SERIO module see “Additional Serial
Ports for the WinPLC” later in this section.
680 mA at 5VDC
6 oz.
0–60°C
-20-70°C
UL Listing
Host Automation Products, LLC.
Programming the WinPLC
Creating flowcharts (projects) for the
WinPLC requires one of the following development packages running on a PC
equipped with an Ethernet card: Think & Do
Live! (PC-ENT-LIVE), the low-cost T&D Live!
for
WinPLC
programming
pack
(PC-WPLC-LIVE), or Think & Do Studio
(PC-ENT-SDD). Since each WinPLC includes
its own run-time license, you can program
as many WinPLCs as you need, at no additional cost. When you compile your project,
the PC automatically downloads the flowcharts into the WinPLC. Then at runtime (or
at power-up), the WinPLC will run the flowchart program.
CE-only version WinPLC
This version of the WinPLC is not preconfigured with any control software. It’s for qualified OEMs or software developers who
want to develop their control code in VB or
C++. AUTOMATIONDIRECT does not sell this
version of the WinPLC. If you are interested
in
the
CE-only
version,
visit
www.hosteng.com for details.
*See the Think & Do PC Control software section in this
catalog for information on the PC-WPLC-START Starter
Kit, and the PC-WPLC-LIVE Think & Do Live! WinPLC
programming package.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
PLCs
DL205 CPU-Slot Slave Controllers
Overview
I/O for general purpose distributed applications.
There are currently four slave “base
controllers” or “slave I/O controllers”
available for the DL205 hardware. This
allows you to use industry proven DL205
The controller modules are plugged into
the CPU slot of any size DL205 base. The
slave controllers must be connected to a
Field I/O
network master controller module or to a
PC running PC-based control, HMI or
SCADA software.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
H2-EBC
Power
Transmiss.
Ethernet Base Controller Module
Ethernet Slaves
H2-EBC slave
See page 5–52
PC-based control
software master
or PLC Ethernet
remote I/O
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
H4-EBC slave
Proximity
Sensors
T1H-EBC slave
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
H2-PBC
Profibus slave nodes
Profibus DP Slave
Base Controller Module
H2-PBC slave
PLC or PC-based Profibus master
H2-PBC slave
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
....
See page 5–60
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
F2-DEVNETS-1
DeviceNet slave nodes
PLC or PC-based DeviceNet master
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
DeviceNet Slave Module
F2-DEVNETS-1 slave
Comm.
F2-DEVNETS-1 slave
Power
See page 5–62
Circuit
Protection
....
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
F2-SDS-1
Smart Distributed System I/O
SDS Slave I/O
F2-SDS-1 slave
PLC or PC-based SDS master
Part Index
F2-SDS-1 slave
See page 5–64
....
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Appendix
PLC Products
e5–35
HERE
Step 3: Additional Communications Ports Needed?
Do you need communications ports in
addition to the built-in CPU communications ports to connect to an operator interface or HMI? Would you like to connect to
a network of other AUTOMATIONDIRECT
products, or a Modbus RTU or Ethernet
network? If so, then choose between the
H2-ECOM(100) Ethernet communications
module or the D2-DCM serial data
communications module. Both modules’
specifications and communications details
are covered later in this section.
Ethernet networking
with the H2-ECOM(100)
The D2-260, D2-250-1 and D2-240
CPUs support the H2-ECOM(100)
Ethernet communications module. Any
PLC on an ECOM network can initiate
communications with another PLC or use
DirectSOFT to program any PLC on the
network. This is the fastest data transfer
rate we offer for HMI or other Windowsbased software. When monitoring your
PLC, you will notice much faster updates
using the ECOM module. The H2ECOM(100) module supports the industry
standard 10Base-T with an RJ45 port. The
H2-ECOM-F has ST-style bayonet connectors for 10Base-FL fiber optic connections.
The ECOM modules use standard cables,
hubs and repeaters which are available
from a large number of suppliers. A virtually unlimited number of PLCs can be
connected to an Ethernet network using
ECOM modules.
Serial networking
with the D2-DCM
The D2-260, D2-250-1, and D2-240
CPUs support the D2-DCM Data
Communications Module, which can
serve as a DirectNet master/slave,
DirectNet peer, or a Modbus RTU slave.
The D2-DCM supports both RS-232 and
RS-422. You can program the CPU
through the DCM locally, or if a PC is the
RS-422 master, you can use DirectSOFT
to program any PLC on the network.
H2-ECOM100 Ethernet network
PCs running DirectSoft PLC
programming software,
DSData or HMI software
E-SW05U Ethernet Switch
(see the Communications
Products section)
D4-450,
D4-440,
or D4-430
H4-ECOM
D2-260,
D2-250-1,
or D2-240
H2-ECOM
H2-ECOM
The H2-ECOM(100) can be used for:
• High-speed peer-to-peer networking of PLCs (any PLC can initiate communications)
• CPU programming with DirectSOFT Programming Software
• High-speed data acquisition via HMI, DSData Server, LookoutDirect or other HMI software
• Virtually unlimited number of network nodes
• Very easy to setup
D2-DCM serial network
Connect
the D2-DCM to our
MDM-TEL serial modem (see
the Communication products section)
DCM as Master
RS232 to RS422
Converter
D2–240 Slave
D2–DCM Slave
DL–405 CPU (bottom port)
Peer-to-peer network
D3–340 Slave
DCM as Peer
DCM as Peer
The D2-DCM can be used for:
• DirectNet networking of PLCs (only one DCM or PC can serve as master)
• Peer-to-peer networking of two DCM modules (each can serve as a master or slave)
• CPU programming with DirectSOFT Programming Software
• Data acquisition via HMI, DSData Server, LookoutDirect or other HMI software
• A slave on a Modbus RTU network
• Connection to a serial modem (MDM-TEL)
e5–36
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
Additional Serial Ports for the WinPLC
H2-SERIO
serial communications
module for the WinPLC
Do you need serial communications ports
in addition to the built-in serial port on the
WinPLC? Do you need to connect to
multiple C-more or other operator interface panels? Would you like to connect
devices such as barcode readers, weight
scales or serial modems to your WinPLC
system? If so, then select the H2-SERIO
serial communications module. This
module is used exclusively with the
WinPLC.
Field I/O
Separate communication Note on processing large
parameters for each port amounts of serial data
Use Think & Do software packages to set
baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits
for each serial port. Choose from 300 to
57.6 Kbaud communication speeds.
Think & Do Studio or Think & Do Live!
allows each port to be designated as a
Modbus slave or a generic serial device.
Each port on the H2–SERIO module is
capable of full hardware handshaking.
While the H2-SERIO module will support
virtually any serial device, processing
large amounts of serial data will increase
the system response time. This is important to consider when using multiple H2SERIO modules, especially in a WinPLC
local base with an H2-ERM or H2-CTRIO
module.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Protocols supported
The H2-SERIO module supports serial
ASCII communications and can also serve
as a Modbus RTU slave.
PLCs
Connect the WinPLC / H2-SERIO system to a
variety of serial or ASCII devices.
Barcode scanners
Weigh scales
C-more HMI panels
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Up to ten serial ports
The WinPLC has one built-in serial port.
Each H2-SERIO module has three serial
ports on board. Up to three H2-SERIO
modules can be used per WinPLC system.
That’s a total of ten serial ports that can
be used in one WinPLC system to handle
all of your serial communications needs.
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
C-more HMI panels
C-more Micro
Graphics panels
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
MDM-TELSerial modems
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–37
HERE
Step 4: Select the I/O Modules
There are several factors you should
consider when choosing an I/O module.
1. Environmental specifications: What environmental conditions will the I/O module be
subjected to?
2. Hardware specifications: Does this
product have the right features, performance
and capacity to adequately serve your application?
3. Field termination: How does this
module connect to field devices? Do you
need a sinking or sourcing DC module?
4. Power budget: It is very important that
your module selections operate within the
base power budget. Refer to the power
budget description later in this section.
Check the environmental
specifications
The following table lists the environmental
specifications that globally apply to the
DL205 system (CPUs, bases, and I/O
modules). Be sure the modules you
choose are operated within these environmental specifications.
Review I/O hardware
specifications
The hardware specifications for every
DL205 module are described later in this
section.
Take time to understand the specification
charts, the derating curves and the wiring
diagrams. The module specifications
should help you determine if this module is
right for your application.
Factors affecting field
termination
DL205 modules use three types of field
terminations. They include a low density
removable terminal block (used on
modules with eight or fewer points), a high
density removable terminal block
(European style terminal block available
on modules with 12 to 16 points), and a
40-pin connector (for modules with 32
points). The module diagrams indicate the
connector type that is on the module. You
can also use our super fast and inexpensive ZIPLink I/O connector systems.
Specifications and ratings
Module types and suggested AWG range
Storage temperature*
-4ºF – 158ºF (-20ºC to 70ºC)
Ambient operating temperature**
32ºF – 131ºF (0º to 55ºC)
Ambient humidity
30% - 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
Vibration resistance
MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2
Shock resistance
MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2
Noise immunity
NEMA (ICS3-304)
Atmosphere
No corrosive gases
* Storage temperature for the Handheld
Programmer is –4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
4 point
16* - 24 AWG
8 point
16* - 24 AWG
12 point
16* - 24 AWG
16 point
16* - 24 AWG
32 point
Ribbon and Solder-style Connectors
* Note: 16 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW can be
used on 8 pt. modules. Other types of 16 AWG
may be acceptable, but it really depends on the
thickness of the wire insulation. If the insulation
is too thick and you use all the I/O points, then
the plastic terminal cover may not close properly.
Storage temperature for the DV-1000 is
–4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
** Operating temperature for the Handheld
Programmer is 32º to 122ºF (0º to 50ºC)
Operating temperature for the DV-1000 is 32º to
122ºF (0º to 50ºC)
This logo is placed by each I/O
module that supports ZIPLink
connection systems. (The I/O
modules are listed at the end of
this section.) See the Terminal
Blocks and Wiring section for
details on ZIPLinks.
e5–38
PLC Products
ZIPLink system connected
to an I/O Module
Need spare parts?
Sometimes it is helpful to have extra I/O
module connectors or spare fuses. The
DL205 spare parts and accessories are
listed below:
• D2-FILL – Filler module for empty slots
• D2-8IOCON – 8-pt. I/O terminal blocks
• D2-16IOCON – 16-pt. I/O terminal blocks
• D2-IOCVR – Spare terminal block covers
• D2-FUSE-1 – Fuses for D2-12TA
• D2-FUSE-3 – Fuses for D2-04TD1, D208TA, D2-04TRS, D2-08TR,
D2-08CDR
• D2-FUSE-4 – Fuses for D2-12TR
• D2-ACC-1 – Base power terminal strip
screws
• D2-ACC-2 – Spare terminal screws for
4-pt. and 8-pt. I/O modules
• D2-ACC-3 –Spare terminal screws for
12-pt. and 16-pt. I/O modules
• D4-IO3264R – Ribbon cable connector
for 32-pt. modules.
• D4-IO3264S – Solder-type connector
for 32-pt. modules.
• DINnectors and ZIPLinks — Refer to
the Terminal Blocks and Wiring section
of this catalog for the complete line of
products available.
DINnectors terminal
blocks
DINnectors
are DIN-rail mounted
connectors or terminal blocks. They
provide a means of connecting and identifying two or more wires. All DINnectors
are UL, CSA, VDE, SEV, RINA and IEC
approved. For more information, refer to
the Terminal Blocks and Wiring section.
ZIPLink connection
systems
ZIPLinks consist of PLC interface cables
and connector modules that offer “plug
and play” capability by plugging one end
of the ZIPLink cable into an I/O module
and the other end into the ZIPLink
connector module. This eliminates the
tedious process of wiring PLC I/O terminals to terminal blocks individually. For
more information, refer to page 4-78 or
see the Terminal Blocks and Wiring
Solutions section in this catalog.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
I/O Availability
PLCs
Field I/O
I/0 Availability Table
PLC CPU / CPU-Slot Controller D2-230 D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260 WinPLC Profibus H2-EBC F2-SDS-1 F2-DEVNETS-1
Discrete Modules Catalog
Pages
DC Sink/Source In
DC Output
AC Input
AC Output
Relay Out
DC In / Relay Out
4-31
4-31
4-29
4-26
4-34
4-60
4-52
4-64
4-62
(except 32-pt.)
(except 32-pt.)
4-108
4-106
4-110
4-112
4-78
4-83
4-80
4-88
4-90
4-95
Analog Modules
Analog Current In
Analog Voltage In
Analog Current Out
Analog Voltage Out
Analog Isolated
Current Out
Analog Isolated
Voltage Out
Combination Analog
Temperature Input
4-96
4-99
4-104
4-102
Speciality Modules
Local Expansion
Communications
Remote I/O
CoProcessor
Counter I/O (CTRIO)
Counter Interface
4-48
4-56
4-55
4-66
4-68
4-76
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
(H2-ERM)
Sinking and sourcing
for DC field devices
Analog module
selection tips
If you are using a DC type of field device,
then you should consider whether the
device is a sinking or sourcing configuration. This may affect your module selection since it determines the manner in
which the device must be wired to the
module (AUTOMATIONDIRECT offers both
sinking and sourcing modules). Refer to
the sinking/sourcing appendix for a
complete explanation on how this affects
your system selection.
If you’re going to control the speed of an
AC inverter or drive with the DL205
analog module, make sure you select
either the current sourcing F2-02DAS-1
or voltage sourcing F2-02DAS-2 isolated
analog output module. Complete
module specifications are listed later in
this section.
If you need to operate within a 12 VDC
environment, the analog module part
numbers that end with (-L) will operate at
12 VDC. Most of the other modules
require 24 VDC.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Software
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
H2-CTRIO vs. D2-CTRINT
high-speed counter
module
Select the H2-CTRIO instead of the
D2-CTRINT if your application requires:
• More than one quadrature encoder
• More than two single up counters
• Compatibility with the WinPLC
• High-speed inputs or outputs > 5 kHz
• Output operations on the module based
on counts without interacting with the
CPU
The CTRIO is configured using “CTRIO
Workbench”, a Windows-based “Wizard”
utility, eliminating the need for ladder
logic programming to configure the
module. Multiple CTRIO modules can be
used in a base to support additional
input/output pulse trains.
PLC Products
e5–39
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
HERE
Step 5: Choose an I/O Configuration
I/O configurations
Ethernet remote I/O
Serial remote I/O
The DL205 system offers local, local
expansion and remote I/O system configurations. A DL205 system can use a combination of the configuration arrangements.
The tables, along with the configuration
diagrams, list the number of I/O points,
bases, etc. that are available with each
configuration.
The DL205 Ethernet Remote I/O system
allows you to locate I/O bases at a remote
distance from the CPU. For many applications, this can reduce wiring costs by
allowing I/O points to be located near the
devices they are controlling.
The DL205 Serial Remote I/O system also
allows you to locate I/O bases at a remote
distance from the CPU.
I/O bases
I/O bases are used in local, local expansion or remote I/O configurations. The (-1)
bases are required for local I/O expansion
that is supported only by the D2-250-1
and D2-260 CPUs. The (-1) bases can be
used with all DL205 CPUs and the
WinPLC. (Older, non-(-1) bases can be
used if local expansion is not required.)
There are four DL205 base sizes (3, 4, 6,
and 9-slot), each of which has a built-in
power supply.
Local I/O
All of the DL205 CPUs support local I/O.
The D2-230 and D2-240 CPUs are
limited to one base of local I/O. (The
D2-250-1 and the D2-260 CPUs support
local expansion bases). All local I/O
points are updated on every CPU scan.
The I/O count limits are determined by the
number of available I/O slots, the I/O
module point density, and the power
budget available for the system.
Local expansion
The D2-260 supports local expansion up to
five total bases (one CPU base and four
expansion bases) and the D2-250-1
supports local expansion up to three total
bases (one CPU base and two expansion
bases). The D2-230/240 CPUs and
WinPLCs do not support local expansion
I/O. Expansion bases are commonly used
when there are not enough slots available in
the CPU base, or when the base power
budget will be exceeded. Each local expansion base requires the D2-CM module in
the CPU slot. The local CPU base requires
the D2-EM Expansion Module, as well as
each expansion base. The modules are
connected using the D2-EXCBL-1. When
using expansion bases, discrete I/O are
updated synchronously with each scan,
while analog I/O are asynchronous with the
scan.
e5–40
PLC Products
The Ethernet Remote Master module
(H2-ERM) is placed in an I/O slot of the
local CPU base. Ethernet Base Controller
(EBC) modules serve as the remote slave
units and are placed in the CPU slot of
one or more remote bases. You can use
standard DL205 modules in the remote
bases. The Remote Slaves are connected
to the Master using Category 5 UTP
cables for cable runs up to 100 meters.
Use repeaters to extend distances and
hubs to expand the number of nodes. Our
fiber optic version uses industry standard
62.5/125 ST-style fiber optic cables and
can be run up to 2,000 meters.
Each H2-ERM module can support up to:
16 H2-EBC systems, 16 Terminator I/O
EBC systems, 16 fully expanded H4-EBC
systems, or any combination of these.
The PLC, ERM and EBC slave modules
work together to update the remote I/O
points. These three scan cycles are occurring at the same time, but asynchronously.
It is recommended that critical I/O points
that must be monitored every scan be
placed in the CPU base.
ERM Workbench is an easy-to-use
Windows-based software utility for configuring the ERM and its remote slaves.
It is highly recommended that a dedicated
Ethernet remote I/O network be used for
the ERM and its slaves. While Ethernet
networks can handle a very large number
of data transactions, and normally handle
them very quickly, heavy Ethernet traffic
can adversely affect the reliability of the
slave I/O and the speed of the I/O
network. Ensure ERM networks, multiple
ERM networks and ECOM/office networks
are isolated from one another.
The Remote Master module (D2-RMSM) is
placed in an I/O slot of the local CPU
base. The Remote Slave module
(D2-RSSS) is placed in the CPU slot of one
or more remote bases. You can use standard DL205 modules in the remote bases.
The Remote Slaves are connected to the
Master module in a daisy-chain manner
over a twisted pair communication cable.
You can assign input and output addresses
to the remote I/O points by using setup
logic in your RLL program. The Remote
Master polls the slaves and sends the
remote I/O information to the CPU. The
communication between the Remote
Master and the CPU is asynchronous to
the CPU scan. For this reason, Remote I/O
applications should be limited to those
that do not require the Remote I/O points
to be updated with every scan.
The number of bases supported depends
on your choice of Remote I/O communications protocol, Remote Master
(RM-NET) or Slice Master (SM-NET). In
SM-NET mode, the communications port
on the D2-RSSS remote slave can be used
to connect to an operator interface or to
program/monitor
the
CPU
with
DirectSOFT; however the communication
will not be as fast as using a CPU port.
Remote master protocol (RM-NET)– allows
you to connect up to seven remote bases
to a single master. The baud rate is fixed at
38.4 Kbaud with a total allowable
distance of 3,900 feet.
Slice master protocol (SM-NET)– allows
you to connect up to 31 remote bases to a
single master. The baud rate is selectable
over several ranges with a maximum baud
rate of 614.4 Kbaud.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
Local and Local Expansion I/O Configurations
Local I/O configurations
Local I/O Configuration
CPU
Total I/O
Max. Inputs Max. Outputs
D2-230
128
128
128
D2-240
256
256
256
D2-250-1
256
256
256
D2-260
256
256
256
Four I/O base configurations to select from
3-slot base 64-pts. max.
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
4-slot base 96-pts. max.
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
6-slot base 160-pts. max.
Motor
Controls
9-slot base 256-pts. max.
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Local expansion I/O configurations using D2-EM and D2-CM modules
Pressure
Sensors
D2-260 local expansion system
D2-250-1 local expansion system
The D2-260 supports local expansion up to five total bases
(one CPU base and four expansion bases). All bases in an
expansion system must be (-1) bases. The CPU base can be
located at any point in the expansion system layout. The
maximum total expansion system cable length is 30m (98 ft.).
For more information, refer to the Expansion Module specification pages later in this section.
The D2-250-1 supports local expansion up to three total bases
(one CPU base and two expansion bases). The CPU base can
be located at any point in the expansion system layout. The
maximum total expansion system cable length is 30m (98 ft.).
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
D2-250-1 CPU
D2-260 CPU
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
D2-EM
D2-EM
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Do not use
Ethernet hubs
to connect the
modules.
D2-CM
D2-CM
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
The D2-EXCBL-1 is a Category 5 straight-through cable that connects the D2-EM
modules together. The cable can be user made in custom lengths up to 30m
depending upon the configuration.
Local Expansion I/O Configuration
D2-CM
D2-EM
Total
I/O
Max.
Inputs
Max.
Outputs
D2-250-1 2
768
512
512
D2-260
1280
1024
1024
CPU
# of Exp.
Bases
4
DL-230, DL240 CPUs and WinPLCs do not support local expansion systems
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–41
Part Index
HERE
Remote I/O Configurations
Ethernet remote I/O configuration using H2-ERM and EBC slaves
Specifications
Communications
Data Transfer Rate
Link Distance
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Protocols
H2-ERM
10Base-T
Ethernet
PC running ERM
Workbench to configure
the ERM and its slaves
H2-ERM-F
10Base-FL Ethernet
10Mbps
100 meters
(328 ft)
RJ45
2Km (6560 ft)
H2-ERM
ST-style fiber optic
TCP/IP, IPX
Ethernet Remote I/O Configuration
CPU
Max. # of
Max. # of
Discrete
Slaves/
Channels
I/O pts.
Channel
Analog
I/O
Remote
I/O pts /
Channel
D2-230
N/A
N/A
N/A
D2-240
N/A
16 Slaves
Limited by
(H2-EBC,
power
H4-EBC or
budget
T1H-EBC)
D2-250-1
D2-260
H2-WPLC*-** 1 / system 1 Slave
N/A
H2-EBC I/O
limited to 896 Not recom- 896
by CPU
mended
2048
8192
256
Map into
available
memory
registers
H4-EBC I/O
16,384 1
E-SW05U Ethernet Switch
(See
the
Communications
Products section for details.)
16,384 1
1,024 2
T1H-EBC I/O
1-16,384 I/O pts. can be achieved with 16 fully expanded H4-EBC slaves using V-memory and bit-of-word instructions.
2 1024 I/O points can be achieved using 1 fully expanded H4-EBC slave.
Note: It is highly recommended that a dedicated Ethernet remote I/O network be used for the ERM and its slaves. While Ethernet networks can handle a very large number
of data transactions, and normally handle them very quickly, heavy Ethernet traffic can adversely affect the reliability of the slave I/O and the speed of the I/O network.
Ensure ERM networks, multiple ERM networks and ECOM/office networks are isolated from one another.
Serial remote I/O configuration using D2-RMSM and D2-RSSS
Serial Remote I/O Configuration
Remote master (RM-NET) protocol
Slice master (SM-NET) protocol
D2-RMSM
D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260
CPU
Max. # of
Channels
Max. I/O
pts. per
Channel
2
7
7
896
(limited
by CPU)
2,048
2,048
7
7
7
31
31
31
896
(limited
by CPU)
2,048
8,192
RM-NET1
Bases per
Channel
D2-RMSM
Ch1
ch1
D2-250-1
D2-260 lower port
Ch2
ch2
D2-240
Ch1
ch1
Ch2
ch2
SM-NET1
Bases per
Channel
Total
Remote
I/O pts.
D2-RSSS Slaves
D2-RSSS Slaves
RM-NET protocol
- Up to 7 bases / channel
- Up to 3,900 ft. (1.2Km)
- Max. baud rate 38.4K baud
- D2-250 CPU has built-in port
SM-NET protocol
- Up to 31 bases / channel
- Up to 3,900 ft. (@38.4 Kbaud)
- Up to 328 ft. (@614.4 Kbaud)
- Max. baud rate 614.4 Kbaud)
- Supports RS-232 port on D2-RSSS
Remote Master – One master for each channel. Can be a D2-RMSM, or
the bottom port on a D2-250-1 or D2-260 CPUs. (The CPU ports only
support RM-NET.)
e5–42
PLC Products
Remote Slave – Must have a D2-RSSS and base for each slave.
The remote I/O points are updated asynchronously to the CPU scan. For
this reason, remote I/O applications should be limited to those that do
not require the I/O points to be updated on every scan.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
I/O Addressing Schemes
DL205 I/O
addressing scheme
You may have used other PLC systems
prior to trying DirectLOGIC products.
One of the key differences between
various PLC systems is the I/O module
addressing. This section will show you
how we address the individual I/O points
in a DL205 system.
Octal addressing
The DL205 uses octal addressing. That
is, the I/O point addresses do not
include any “8s” or “9s”. The I/O points
start at 0 and continue in increments of 8
or 16 points, depending on the modules
being used. We have designated “X” for
inputs and “Y” for outputs.
Note: Four-point modules consume eight points, but
only the first four points are actually used by the
module. Twelve-point modules consume 16 points,
but only 12 points are used. The first six points are
used, then two points are skipped, then the next six
points are used, and the last two are skipped.
PLCs
Field I/O
Since the CPU automatically assigns the
I/O addresses, it is possible to cause
problems by adding a module to the
system. Examine the example system
shown below. If you added an input
module to the empty slot, the new input
addresses would start after the existing
input addresses, so no problems would
occur. However, if you added an output
to the empty slot, your remaining output
addresses would change. Therefore, you
would have to edit your RLL program to
reflect the address changes. The manual
addressing feature supported by the
D2-250-1 and D2-260 is especially
useful when adding an I/O module
between existing I/O modules or
removing a module.
Remote I/O addressing
Remote I/O allows you to assign
addresses manually. You can choose the
data type for the remote points. Ethernet
remote I/O (H2-ERM) allows you to map
the analog I/O channels directly into
V-memory (16-bit words) while mapping
the discrete I/O points into input/output
bit memory (Xs & Ys). Serial remote I/O
(D2-RMSM) allows you to assign one
starting address for all of the input
modules and one starting address for the
output modules.
Leaving empty slots
You may be tempted to leave empty slots
for future expansion. This is perfectly
acceptable, but it is very important that
you understand the implications of
placing a module in the empty slot at a
later time.
CPU
You should always add extra modules to the right of
existing modules of the same type to avoid any
re-addressing of your I/O points.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
16-pt. in
Current
Sensors
8-pt. in 4-pt. out 8-pt. out 12-pt. out
Pressure
Sensors
Automatic addressing
The DL205 CPUs automatically examine
local I/O modules to establish the
correct I/O addressing on power-up. The
D2-250-1 and D2-260 CPUs automatically examine I/O modules in expansion
bases as well. The modules don’t have to
be grouped by type and can typically be
mixed in any order. However, there are
restrictions placed on some specialty
modules or combinations of modules
(see the next page). The diagram to the
right shows sample addresses for a
simple system that contains a few discrete
I/O modules.
X0--X7
X10--X17
X20--X27
Y0--Y3
Y10--Y17
Y4--Y7
(unused)
Y20--Y25
Y30--Y35
Temp.
Sensors
Y26--Y27
Y36--Y37
(unused)
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Inputs start at X0
Outputs start at Y0
4-pt. module has
four points unused
12-pt. module skips points
and has four unused points
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y7
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Y10
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Power
Circuit
Protection
I/O base with a slot left empty. The examples below show the addressing changes if an
input or an output module is added to the system.
Manual addressing
The D2-250-1 and D2-260 CPUs allow
you to manually assign I/O addresses for
any or all I/O slots on the local or expansion bases. This feature is useful if you
have a standard configuration that you
need to change slightly to accommodate
a special request (i.e. adding or
removing I/O modules from a system).
Manual addresses are based on 16point boundaries.
Enclosures
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X27
X30
-X37
X40
-X47
Y0
-Y7
Y10
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Add Input module. Addresses follow existing, so no program modification
is required.
Part Index
X0
-X7
X10
-X17
X20
-X27
Y0
-Y7
Y10
-Y17
Y20
-Y27
Y30
-Y37
Y40
-Y47
Add output module. Addresses are re-numbered and program modification is required.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–43
HERE
Module Placement and I/O Usage Tables
Verify planned I/O
module locations
There are very few I/O module placement
restrictions in the DL205 family. In
general, any mix of analog and discrete
module types can be used in any local,
expansion or remote base. However, there
are a few situations with the analog and
specialty modules that warrant some
special considerations. Reference the
Module Placement Restrictions table to the
right for the DL205.
Analog I/O
with a D2-230 CPU
DL205 analog modules map into the CPU
as 16-point discrete modules. (They actually consume discrete I/O points.) With a
D2-240, D2-250(-1) or D2-260 CPU,
analog I/O modules can reside in any I/O
slot. If you are using a D2-230 CPU, then
the analog module must start on one of
the word addresses boundaries. (You may
have to rearrange your modules to ensure
this happens.)
Module Placement Restrictions
Module/Unit
Local CPU Base
Local Expansion
Remote Base
CPUs
DC Input
AC Input
DC Output
AC Output
Relay Output
1
Analog Input & Output
CPU slot only
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Local Expansion2
(D2-260 & D2-250-1 only)
✓
✓
Base Expansion Unit (D2-EM)
Base Controller Unit (D2-CM)
CPU slot only
Remote I/O
Remote Master
✓
Remote Slave Unit
CPU slot only
Ethernet Remote Master
✓
CPU Device
Ethernet Base Controller
CPU slot only
WinPLC
CPU slot only
DeviceNET
CPU slot only
Profibus
CPU slot only
SDS
CPU slot only
Specialty modules
Counter Interface (D2-CTRINT)
Slot 0 only
3
Counter I/O (H2-CTRIO)
Any slot except Slot 0
✓
Simulator
✓
✓
Any slot except Slot 0
Data Communications
Any slot except Slot 0
Ethernet Communications
Any slot except Slot 0
Basic CoProcessor
1
With a D2-230 CPU, the analog module must start on one of the word address boundaries.
2
When used in expansion bases, the analog update is asynchronous to the PLC.
3
H2-CTRIO will not work in slot 0 when used with the DL-240, DL-250-1, DL-260. The H2-CTRIO is not supported in expansion bases at this time. The H2-CTRIO will work in slot 0 if used with one of the H2-WPLC units.
Analog I/O with
expansion bases
When using an analog module in an
expansion base, the analog update time
to the CPU will be asynchronous to the
scan time.
I/O Module Point Usage
DC INPUT
D2-08ND3
D2-16ND3-2
D2-32ND3
D2-32ND3-2
RELAY OUTPUT
8 in
16 in
32 in
32 in
D2-04TRS
D2-08TR
F2-08TR
F2-08TRS
D2-12TR
8 in
8 in
16 in
COMBINATION
SPECIALTY MODULES
8* out
8 out
8 out
8 out
16** out
I/O point usage
The table to the right indicates the number
of I/O points consumed by each module.
Use this information to ensure you stay
within the maximum I/O count of the I/O
system you have chosen.
AC INPUT
D2-08NA-1
D2-08NA-2
D2-16NA
DC OUTPUT
D2-04TD1
D2-08TD1
D2-08TD2
D2-16TD1-2
D2-16TD2-2
F2-16TD1P
F2-16TD2P
D2-32TD1
D2-32TD2
AC OUTPUT
D2-08CDR
8 in*/8 out*
ANALOG
8* out
8 out
8 out
16 out
16 out
16 in/16 out
16 in/16 out
32 out
32 out
F2-04AD-1 & 1L
F2-04AD-2 & 2L
F2-08AD-1
F2-08AD-2
F2-02DA-1 & 1L
F2-02DA-2 & 2L
F2-4AD2DA
F2-8AD4DA-1
F2-8AD4DA-2
F2-02DAS-1
F2-02DAS-2
F2-08DA-1
F2-08DA-2
F2-04RTD
F2-04THM
16 in
16 in
16 in
16 in
16 out
16 out
16 in/16 out
32 in/32 out
32 in/32 out
32 out
32 out
16 out
16 out
32 in
32 in
D2-EX
D2-CM
F2-08SIM
D2-CTRINT
H2-CTRIO
D2-DCM
F2-DEVNETS-1
F2-SDS-1
H2-EBC
H2-EBC-F
H2-ECOM
H2-ECOM-F
F2-CP128
H2-PBC
None
None
8 in
8 in 8 out
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
REMOTE I/O
H2-ERM
D2-RMSM
D2-RSSS
None
None
None
D2-08TA
8 out
F2-08TA
8 out
D2-12TA
16** out
* 4-pt. modules consume eight points. Only the first four points are used.
** 12-pt. modules consume 16 points. The first six points are assigned, two are skipped, and then the next six
points are assigned. For example, a D2-12TA installed in slot 0 would use Y0-Y5, and Y10-Y15. Y6-Y7, and
Y16-Y17 would be unused.
e5–44
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
Step 6: Check the Power Budget
1.Using a chart similar to the one below,
fill in column 2.
Managing your power
resource
When determining the types and quantity
of I/O modules you will be using, it is
important to remember there is a defined
amount of power available from the base
power supply.
The chart on the next page indicates the
power supplied and used by each DL205
device. The adjacent chart shows an
example of how to calculate the power
used by your particular system. These
charts should make it easy for you to
determine if the devices you have chosen
will operate within the power budget of
your system configuration.
If the I/O you have chosen exceeds the
maximum power available from the
power supply, you may be able to resolve
the problem by using local expansion or
remote I/O bases.
2.Using the tables on the next page, enter
the current supplied and used by each
device (columns 3 and 4). Devices
which fall into the "Other" category
(Row D) are devices such as the operator interface and the handheld
programmer, which also have power
requirements, but do not directly plug
into the base.
3.Add the current used by the system
devices (columns 3 and 4) starting with
the CPU slot and put the total in the
row labeled “Maximum Current
Required” (Row E).
PLCs
Field I/O
row labeled “Current Supplied” (Row B).
Place the difference in the row labeled
“Remaining Current Available” (Row F).
5.If “Maximum Current Required” is
greater than “Current Supplied” in
either column 3 or 4, the power budget
will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to
use this configuration, and you will
need to restructure your I/O configuration. Note the auxiliary power supply
does not need to supply all the external
power. If you need more than the
300mA supplied, you can add an
external 24V power supply. This will
help keep you within your power
budget for external power.
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Device Type
5VDC (mA)
Column 4
External Power 24
VDC (mA)
B CURRENT SUPPLIED
DL205 power supply
specifications
Base
9 slot
2,600
300
CPU SLOT
SLOT 0
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 7
Power budget example
The example on the right shows how to
calculate the power budget for the DL205
system. The examples are constructed
around a single 9-slot base using the
devices shown. It is recommended you
construct a similar table for your DL205
system. Follow the steps to the right to
determine your power budget.
D2-260 (CPU)
D2-16ND3-2
D2-16ND3-2
D2-16NA
D2-08NA-1
D2-16TD1-2
D2-08TA
D2-08TA
330
100
100
100
50
200
250
250
0
0
0
0
0
80
0
0
Part Numbers
Auxiliary 24 VDC Output
Maximum Inrush Current
Maximum Power
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
DV-1000
D2-HPP
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
E Maximum Current Required
1730
80
F Remaining Current Available
2600-1520=1080
300-80=220
Power
24 VDC Powered Bases
D2-03BDC1-1, D2-04BDC1-1,
D2-06BDC1-1, D2-09BDC1-1
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
125 VDC Powered Bases
D2-04BDC-2, D2-06BDC2-1,
D2-09BDC2-1
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
85-132 VAC (110 range)
170-264 VAC ( 220 range)
47-63Hz
10.2-28.8 VDC (24 VDC)
with less than 10% ripple
300mA max.
none
300mA max.
30A
10A
20A
80 VA
25W
30W
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Proximity
Sensors
Comm.
Voltage Withstand (dielectric) 1 minute @ 1,500 VAC between primary, secondary, field ground, and run relay
> 10M at 500 VDC
Insulation Resistance
Input Voltage Range
Motor
Controls
Relays/
Timers
0
0
D2-03B-1, D2-04B-1, D2-06B-1, D2-09B-1
Steppers/
Servos
Process
150
200
AC Powered Bases
Power
Transmiss.
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Power Supply Specifications
Specification
AC Motors
Temp.
Sensors
D OTHER
Operator interface
Handheld programmer
AC Drives
Pressure
Sensors
C CURRENT REQUIRED
The table below lists base power supply
specifications, including maximum inrush
current and maximum power consumed
from your power source.
C-more &
other HMI
Photo
Sensors
4.Subtract the row labeled “Maximum
Current Required” (Row E), from the
A
Software
100-264 VDC (125 VDC)
with less than 10% ripple
PLC Products
e5–45
HERE
Power Requirements
These charts help
determine your power
requirements
This section shows the amount of power
supplied by each of the base power
supplies and the amount of power
consumed by each DL205 device. The
Power Consumed charts list how much
INTERNAL power from each power source
is required for the DL205 devices. Use this
information when calculating the power
budget for your system.
In addition to the internal power sources,
the DL205 bases offer a 24 VDC auxiliary
power supply with external power connections. This auxiliary power supply can
power external devices.
Use ZIPLinks to reduce
power requirements
Power Supplied
Device
Bases
Price 5V(mA) 24V Auxiliary
Device
Bases
Price
5V(mA) 24V Auxiliary
D2-03B-1
<--->
2600
300
D2-06BDC1-1
<--->
2600
None
D2-03BDC1-1 <--->
2600
None
D2-06BDC2-1
<--->
2600
300
D2-04B-1
<--->
2600
300
D2-09B-1
<--->
2600
300
D2-04BDC1-1 <--->
2600
None
D2-09BDC1-1
<--->
2600
None
D2-06B-1
2600
300
D2-09BDC2-1
<--->
2600
300
<--->
Power Consumed
Power Consumed
Device
CPUs
5V(mA)
24V Auxiliary
Device
5V(mA)
Analog Modules
24V Auxiliary
D2-230
120
0
F2-04AD-1
50
80
D2-240
120
0
F2-04AD-1L
50
90 mA @ 12V
D2-250-1
330
0
F2-04AD-2
60
80
D2-260
330
0
F2-04AD-2L
60
90 mA @ 12V
H2-WPLC*-**
680
0
F2-08AD-1
50
80
F2-08AD-2
50
80
0
F2-02DA-1
40
60 (note 1)
40
70 @ 12V (note 1)
DC Input Modules
D2-08ND3
50
D2-16ND3-2
100
0
F2-02DA-1L
If your application requires a lot of relay
outputs, consider using the ZIPLink AC or
DC relay output modules. These modules
can switch high current (10A) loads
without putting a load on your base power
budget. Refer to the Terminal Blocks and
Wiring Solutions section in this catalog for
more information.
D2-32ND3
25
0
F2-02DA-2
40
60
D2-32ND3-2
25
0
F2-02DA-2L
40
70 @ 12V
F2-02DAS-1
F2-02DAS-2
100
100
50 / channel
60 / channel
F2-08DA-1
30
50 (note 1)
F2-08DA-2
60
140
F2-4AD2DA
60
80 (note 1)
This logo is placed next to the I/O
modules that are supported by the ZIPLink
connection systems. See the I/O module
specifications at the end of this section.
F2-08SIM
F2-8AD4DA-1
35
100 (note 1)
F2-8AD4DA-2
35
80 (note 1)
F2-04RTD
90
0
F2-04THM
110
60
AC Input Modules
D2-08NA-1
50
0
D2-08NA-2
100
0
D2-16NA
24V Auxiliary
Operator Interface
DV-1000
150
0
C-more MicroGraphic
210
0
0
D2-04TD1
60
20
D2-08TD1
100
0
D2-08TD2
100
0
D2-16TD1-2
200
80
200
0
F2-16TD1P
70
50
F2-16TD2P
70
50
D2-32TD2
5V(mA)
50
DC Output Modules
D2-32TD1
Device
0
Input Simulator Module
D2-16TD2-2
Power Consumed
100
350
350
0
0
AC Output Modules
D2-08TA
250
0
F2-08TA
250
0
D2-12TA
350
0
Relay Output Modules
D2-04TRS
250
0
D2-08TR
250
0
F2-08TR(S)
670
0
D2-12TR
450
0
Combination In/Out Module
D2-08CDR
e5–46
PLC Products
200
0
Specialty Modules
D2-CTRINT
50*
0
D2-CM / D2-EM
100/130
0
H2-CTRIO
400
0
D2-DCM
300
0
F2-DEVNETS
160
0
F2-SDS-1
160
0
H2-PBC
530
0
H2-EBC(-F)
450, (640)
0
H2-ECOM(-F)
450, (640)
0
H2-ECOM100
300
0
F2-CP128
235
0
H2-ERM(-F)
320, (450)
0
D2-RMSM
200
0
D2-RSSS
150
0
Remote I/O
Programming Devices
D2-HPP
200
0
*requires external 5VDC for outputs
Note 1: Add an additional 20 mA per output loop.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
HERE
Company
Info.
Dimensions and Installation
PLCs
Field I/O
Understanding the installation requirements for your DL205 system will help
ensure that the DL205 products operate
within their environmental and electrical
limits.
See
the Enclosures section
for an enclosure that may
be suitable for your
application
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Plan for safety
This catalog should never be used as a
replacement for the user manual. The user
manual, D2-USER-M (sold separately or
downloadable online), contains important
safety information that must be followed.
The system installation should comply with
all appropriate electrical codes and standards.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
2"
50mm
min
Base dimensions
and mounting
Use the diagrams below to make sure the
DL205 system can be installed in your
application. To ensure proper airflow for
cooling purposes, DL205 bases must be
mounted horizontally. It is important to
check these dimensions against the conditions required for your application. For
example, it is recommended that approximately 3" of space is left in front PLC
surface for ease of access and cable clearances. Also, check the installation guidelines
for
recommended
cabinet
clearances.
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Environmental Specification
Storage Temperature
Ambient Operating Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Noise Immunity
Atmosphere
With 8pt. I/O
5.85”
148mm
4.45”
113mm
3.62”
92mm
2.95”
75mm
Pressure
Sensors
Rating
-4oF - 158oF (-20oC to 70oC)
Temp.
Sensors
32oF - 131oF (0oC to 55oC)
Pushbuttons/
Lights
30%-95% relative humidity (non-condensing)
MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2
Process
MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2
Relays/
Timers
NEMA (ICS3-304)
No corrosive gases
Comm.
Base
A
B
C
D
D2-03B-1, D2-03BDC1-1
6.77" 172mm 6.41" 163mm 5.8"
D2-04B-1, D2-04BDC1-1
7.99" 203mm 7.63" 194mm 7.04" 179mm 8.46" 215mm
D2-06B-1, D2-06BDC1-1, D2-06BDC2-1
10.43" 265mm 10.07" 256mm 9.48" 241mm 10.90" 277mm
D2-09B-1, D2-09BDC1-1, D2-09BDC2-1
14.09" 358mm 13.74" 349mm 13.14" 334mm 14.56" 370mm
148mm 7.24" 184mm
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
A
C
With 16pt. I/O
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
The Environmental Specifications table at
the right lists specifications that apply
globally to the DL205 system (CPUs,
bases, and I/O modules). Be sure that the
DL205 system is operated within these
environmental specifications.
With 32pt. ZipLink cable or
base expansion unit cable
Proximity
Sensors
2"
50mm
min
Environmental
specifications
With D2-DSCB-1 on port 2
Power
Transmiss.
2"
50mm
min
Tools
OK
Pneumatics
3.54”
90mm
2.99”
76mm
Appendix
Part Index
B
Airflow
With D2-EM base expansion module
D
DIN rail slot (35mm)
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–47
Local Expansion Modules
Base Expansion
Module
D2-EM <--->
D2-EM Expansion Module Specifications
Module Type
I/O Slots Consumed
I/O Points Consumed
Expansion Connectors
Cable
Maximum Cable Length
Power Consumption
Base expansion unit
Operating Environment
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF),
5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
None; attaches to right side of (-1) bases
None
Two 8-pin RJ45
Category 5 with RJ45 connectors (straight-through)
30m (98ft.) total expansion system
130mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
D2-CM Controller Module Specifications
Expansion Base
Controller Module
D2-CM
<--->
Module Type
Modules per Base
I/O Points Consumed
Expansion Base Number Select Switch
Power Consumption
Expansion base controller module
Operating Environment
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF),
5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
One, CPU slot of (-1) base only
None
Rotary switch select 1-4 in any order
100mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base)
CPU Supported / I/O Points
CPU
# of Exp.
Bases
Total
I/O*
Max.
Inputs
Max.
Outputs
D2-260
4
1280
1024
1024
D2-250-1
2
768
512
512
D2-240
D2-230
These CPUs do not support local expansion systems.
H2-WPLC*-**
* Includes CPU base and local expansion bases
Local expansion modules
The D2-260 supports local expansion up to
five total bases (one CPU base + four
expansion bases), and the D2-250-1
supports local expansion up to three total
bases (one CPU base + two expansion
bases). Expansion bases are commonly used
when there are not enough slots available in
the CPU base, when the base power budget
will be exceeded, or when placing an I/O
base at a location away from the CPU base
but within the expansion cable limits.
Expansion base I/O addressing is based
on the numerical order of the D2-CM
rotary switch selection. The CPU recognizes
the expansion bases on power-up.
Local expansion
requires (-1) bases
D2-EXCBL-1 local
expansion base cable
Part number D2-xxB(xxx)-1 I/O bases must
be used in local expansion systems. Each
expansion base requires that the D2-CM
module is placed in the CPU slot. The CPU
base and each expansion base require the
D2-EM unit that attaches to the right side of
the (-1) bases.
The category 5 straight-through cable
D2-EXCBL-1 (1m) is used to connect the
expansion modules together. If longer
cable lengths are required, we recommend
that you purchase commercially manufactured cables with RJ45 connectors already
installed. The maximum total expansion
system cable length is 30m (98 ft.).
8-pin RJ45 Connector
8P8C
D2-EM to D2-EM Cable Pin-outs
(Use Category 5 straight-through cable)
I/O Considerations
When using expansion bases in a PLC
system, the CPU updates all discrete I/O
points on every scan. However, if using
analog modules in an expansion base,
they are updated asynchronous to the CPU
scan. Therefore, it is recommended that
analog modules be placed in the CPU
base.
e5–48
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Local Expansion Modules
D2-CM Expansion Base
Controller Module
The D2-CM module is placed in the CPU
slot of each expansion base.
The rotary switch is used
to select the expansion
base number. The
expansion base I/O
addressing (Xs & Ys) is
based on the numerical
order of the rotary switch
selection and is recognized by the CPU on
power-up. Duplicate expansion base
numbers will not be recognized by the
CPU. An example of base I/O addressing
order is shown to the right.
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-260 expansion system
TERM
Switch
ON
D2-CM #1
30m
max.
D2-CM #2
D2-CM #3
D2-CM #4
D2-EM Base
Expansion Module
Field I/O
The D2-EM expansion unit is attached
to the right side of each
base in the expansion system. The
D2-EMs on each
end of the expansion system should
have the TERM switch
placed in the ON position.
The expansion units between the endmost units should have the TERM
switch placed in the OFF position. The
CPU base can be located at any base
position in the expansion system. It
does not have to be located at one end
or the other.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
TERM Switch = ON
D2-260
expansion system
The D2-260 supports local expansion up to
five total bases (one CPU base + four
expansion bases) and up to a maximum of
1280 total I/O points. All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU
scan. No specialty modules can be located
in the expansion bases. Refer to the Module
Placement Table earlier in this section for
restrictions. The maximum total expansion
system cable length is 30m (98 ft.). The red
text and arrows in the example to the right
indicate the I/O addressing order.
Limit
Switches
The D2-260 CPU base can be located at any base
position in the expansion system.
Current
Sensors
TERM Switch = OFF
D2-CM #3
I/O #1
TERM Switch = OFF
D2-CM #1 I/O #2
I/O #3
D2-250-1
expansion system
TERM
Switch
= OFF
I/O #4
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
D2-CM #4
TERM Switch =ON
D2-CM #2
The D2-250-1 supports local expansion up
to three total bases (one CPU base + two
expansion bases) and up to a maximum of
768 total I/O points. All discrete I/O Points
update every CPU scan while analog I/O
are updated asynchronously to the CPU
scan. If the analog update time is critical to
the application, it is recommended to
install the analog modules in the CPU
base. The D2-250-1 does not support the
use of specialty modules located in the
expansion bases. The maximum total
expansion system cable length is 30m (98
ft.). The red text and arrows in the example
to the right indicate the I/O addressing
order.
Encoders
I/O #5
TERM Switch
=ON
Note: Only discrete and analog I/O modules
are supported on the expansion bases. No
specialty or communications modules can be
used on the expansion bases at this time.
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
TERM Switch=ON
D2-CM #2
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
I/O #2
Tools
I/O #3
Pneumatics
Appendix
D2-CM #1
TERM Switch =ON
Part Index
TERM Switch = OFF
D2-250-1
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
I/O #1
PLC Products
e5–49
Ethernet Vs. Serial Remote I/O
I/O throughput
I/O throughput is defined as the time it
takes from when an output is set in the
ladder logic to when its corresponding
input value is equal. This includes the PLC
scan time, I/O backplane update time,
and I/O module response times.
H2-ERM / H2-EBC Ethernet Remote I/O System
Testing I/O
throughput times
A test was performed by our partner, Host
Automation Products, to compare the difference between H2-ERM Ethernet remote I/O
and D2-RMSM serial remote I/O throughput
times. Host Automation Products supplies the
H2-ERM, H2-EBC, H2-ECOM, etc. as well
as DirectSOFT and DSData Server software.
Analog
Outputs
I/O groups tested
Discrete I/O - D2-16TD1-2 discrete
outputs of slot 2 are tied to the
D2-16ND3-2 discrete inputs of slot 0.
Discrete
Outputs
Discrete
Inputs
Analog
Inputs
D2-RMSM / D2-RSSS Serial Remote I/O System
Analog I/O - F2-02DAS-2 analog output
channel 1 is tied to the F2-04AD-2 analog
input channel 1 of slot 3. The analog
values were scaled from the full 16- bit
range down to 12 bit range.
Each group was run independently through
the following cycle 256 times:
Step 1: Set all outputs to OFF for a
random number of scans
Discrete
Outputs
Discrete
Inputs
Step2: Set all outputs to a random value
for a random number of scans
Step 3: Set all outputs to ON for a random
number of scans
Step 4: Set all outputs to a random value
for a random number of scans
Analog
Outputs
Analog
Inputs
Since these four steps are repeated 256
times, there are actually 1,024 samples of
I/O throughput.
Test results
The results are listed in the tables at the right.
As the number of H2-ERM slaves and I/O
points increase, the I/O throughput times will
remain flat until 64 analog inputs, 64 analog
outputs, or 1,024 discrete I/O points are
exceeded. As the number of D2-RMSM slaves
and I/O points increase, the I/O throughput
times increase proportionally.
e5–50
PLC Products
Discrete I/O Test
I/O Throughput Times
Remote I/O System
Min.
Max.
Avg.
Std. Dev.
H2-ERM / H2-EBC
45ms
71ms
53.32ms
6.14ms
D2-RMSM / D2-RSSS
36ms
56ms
42.29ms
5.81ms
Analog I/O Test
I/O Throughput Times
Remote I/O System
Min.
Max.
Avg.
Std. Dev.
H2-ERM / H2-EBC
46ms
113ms
62.94ms
14.48ms
D2-RMSM / D2-RSSS
64ms
321ms
117.38ms
37.44ms
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Ethernet Remote I/O Master Modules
Ethernet
Remote I/O
Master Module
H2-ERM
<--->
H2-ERM-F <--->
Simple connections
Software configuration
The ERM connects to your control
network using Category 5 UTP cables for
cable runs up to 100 meters. Use
repeaters to extend distances and expand
the number of nodes. Our fiber optic
version uses industry standard 62.5/125
ST-style fiber optic cables and can be run
up to 2,000 meters.
ERM Workbench is a software utility that
must be used to configure the ERM and
its remote Ethernet slaves. ERM workbench supports two methods of configuring the ERM I/O network:
The PLC, ERM and EBC slave modules
work together to update the remote I/O
points. These three scan cycles are occurring at the same time, but asynchronously. Critical I/O points that must be
monitored every scan are best placed in
the CPU base.
Networking ERMs with
other Ethernet devices
Overview
The Ethernet Remote Master H2-ERM (-F)
connects 240, 250-1 and 260 CPU
systems to slave I/O over a high-speed
Ethernet link. The H2-ERM can also be
used in a WinPLC system, but only one
H2-ERM can be used with one slave per
system.
Need a lot of I/O?
Each ERM module can support up to 16
additional
H2-EBC
systems,
16
Terminator I/O EBC systems, or 16 fully
expanded H4-EBC systems. Of course,
combinations are fine, too. The ERM also
supports Edrives. See the Drives section
for details.
Note: Applications requiring an extremely
large number of T1H-EBC analog I/O or
H4-EBC 16-channel analog I/O, could
exceed the buffer capacity of a single
H2-ERM module. In these cases, an
additional H2-ERM may be required.
Specifications H2-ERM
Communications
10BaseT
Ethernet
10Mbps
100 meters
(328 ft)
2K meters (6560 ft)
Ethernet Port
RJ45
ST-style fiber optic
450mA @5VDC
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
E-SW05U Ethernet Switch
(see the Communications
Products section for details)
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
PC running ERM Workbench to
configure the ERM and its
slaves.The PC may be removed
once the system is configured.
Power
H2-ERM
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
H2-EBC
system
H4-EBC
system
E-SW05U
Ethernet Switch
T1H-EBC
system
GS2 drives
Host Automation Products, L.L.C.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Tools
Pneumatics
Up to 100m
segments
between
switches
GS-EDRV
TCP/IP, IPX
320mA
@5VDC
ERM Workbench Software
H2-ERM-F
Link Distance
Ethernet Protocols
Power
Consumption
Manufacturer
• ERM Workbench PLC Wizard greatly
simplifies the configuration procedure
when a PLC is used as the CPU interface.
• ERM Workbench configures the I/O
network whether the CPU interface is a
PLC or WinPLC, and allows access to
all ERM I/O network parameters.
It is highly recommended that a dedicated Ethernet remote I/O network be
used for the ERM and its slaves. While
Ethernet networks can handle a large
number of data transactions, and
normally handle them very quickly, heavy
Ethernet traffic can adversely affect the
reliability of the slave I/O and the speed
of the I/O network. Ensure ERM networks,
multiple ERM networks and ECOM/office
networks are isolated from one another.
10BaseFL Ethernet
Data Transfer Rate
Company
Info.
PLC Products
e5–51
Appendix
Part Index
Ethernet Base Controller Modules
Specifications
Ethernet Base
Controller
Modules (EBC)
H2-EBC
<--->
H2-EBC100 <--->
H2-EBC-F <--->
Communications
Data Transfer Rate
Link Distance
Ethernet Port /
Protocols
H2-EBC
H2-EBC100
H2-EBC-F
10Base-T Ethernet
10/100Base-T Ethernet
10Base-FL Ethernet
10 Mbps max.
100 Mbps max.
10 Mbps max.
100 meters (328 ft)
100 meters (328 ft)
2,000 meters (6,560 ft)
RJ45, TCP/IP, IPX
RJ45, TCP/IP, IPX, Modbus TCP/IP,
DHCP, HTML configuration
ST-style fiber optic ,
TCP/IP, IPX
RJ12, K-Sequence,
RJ12, K-Sequence, ASCII IN/OUT
Serial Port / Protocols ASCII IN/OUT
Modbus RTU
300 mA
Power Consumption 450 mA
Host
Automation
Products,
L.L.C.
Manufacturer
None
640 mA
Software developers
For programmers developing custom drivers
for our I/O, we offer a free Ethernet Software
Development Kit (SDK). The SDK, developed
and offered by Host Automation Products,
L.L.C., provides a simplified API for interfacing
with the H2-EBC(100) or H2-EBC-F. The software interface libraries are provided for
WIN32, WIN16, and DOS operating systems.
The source code is available to developers
under a non-disclosure agreement. Visit the
technical support link at our Web site, or go to
www.hosteng.com for more information.
E-SW05U
Ethernet Switch
Off-the-shelf
solutions
Use EBCs for
PC-based control and for
H*-ERM remote I/O slaves
The H2-EBC(100) and H2-EBC-F Ethernet
Base Controller modules provide a lowcost, high-performance Ethernet link
between DL205 I/O and your PC-based
control system or WinPLC/DL205/ DL405
CPUs using the H*-ERM module for
remote I/O. The H2-EBC100 can also be
used to connect your DL205 I/O to a
Modbus TCP/IP client (master). The
H2-EBC module supports industry standard 10BaseT Ethernet communications.
The H2-EBC100 supports industry standard 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications, and the H2-EBC-F module supports
10BaseFL (fiber optic) Ethernet communications standards. The EBC modules are
compatible with TCP/IP, IPX and Modbus
TCP/IP (H2-EBC100 only) protocols for
flexible PC communications. EBC modules
offer:
• Lower cost on your DirectLOGIC I/O
system when compared to competitive I/O
• Virtually unlimited number of I/O points
e5–52
PLC Products
READ I/O
int HEIReadIO
(
HEIDevice *pDevice,
Byte *pBuffer,
You can purchase PC-based
WORD BuffSize
control software that is ready
);
to use with the H2-EBC(100) WRITING I/O
or H2-EBC-F module. PC- int HEIWriteIO
(
based control packages are
HEIDevice *pDevice,
BYTE *pData,
equipped with compatible I/O
WORD SizeofData,
BYTE *pReturnData,
device drivers, program develWORD
*pSizeofReturnData
opment tools, and run-time
);
environments. For a single-source
integrated PC-based control solution that
ships with everything you need to make
your PC into an industrial controller, see
the PC-based Control section of this
The H2-EBC(100) and H2-EBC-F module
catalog . Most of the software packages
plugs into the CPU slot of any DL205 I/O
listed below allow you to connect serial
base and supports all DL205 discrete and
devices, such as barcode readers, to the
analog I/O modules, the H2-SERIO and
H2-EBC(100)’s serial port.
H2-CTRIO specialty modules. All EBC
modules can be configured using
NetEdit3, a free Windows software utility.
The chart below identifies vendors that have PC-based Control prodThe H2-EBC100 also supports HTML
ucts ready to control DirectLOGIC I/O, or have products to be released
in the immediate future.
configuration.
Easy to use,
reliable and fast
Vendor
Product
Web Address
AutomationDirect
KEPDirect EBC I/O Server
www.automationdirect.com
Phoenix Contact
Think & Do Live!, Think & Do Studio
www.phoenixcon.com/software
KEPware
KEPServerEX
www.kepware.com
Wonderware
InControl
www.wonderware.com
MDSI
OpenCNC
www.mdsi2.com
The D2-INST-M installation and I/O Manual covers information about DL205 I/O modules, power budgeting, and installation and wiring. This catalog does
not cover CPU-slot controllers.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Ethernet Remote I/O Kits
Company
Info.
PLCs
Ethernet
Remote I/O Kits
H2-ERKIT-x
H2-ERKIT-x Ethernet
Remote I/O Kits
Field I/O
Software
An H2-ERKIT-x Ethernet Remote I/O Kit
includes one H2-ERM Ethernet Remote
Master module and up to “x” number of
H2-EBC Ethernet Base Controller
modules by adding -1, -2, -3, etc. as the
part number suffix. (See the table below.)
An H2-ERKIT-2 is shown below, which
includes one H2-ERM and two H2-EBC
modules. All other necessary hardware,
including the CPU, I/O modules, bases,
cables and Ethernet hub (if required), is
sold separately.
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
T12-ERKIT-x
Photo
Sensors
H2-ERM
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Overview
The DL205 PLC Ethernet Remote I/O
system is available at prices that are
better than many serial remote I/O
combinations. This means you can make
the switch from Serial PLC Remote I/O to
Ethernet Remote I/O and gain all the
ease-of-use, diagnostics, and performance of Ethernet connectivity, for little or
no additional installation cost.
Current
Sensors
E-SW05U
(not included)
H2-EBC system
H2-EBC system
Pressure
Sensors
Example of an Ethernet remote I/O system using an H2-ERKIT-2. CPU, bases, I/O
modules, Ethernet hub, etc. are sold separately.
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Example kit shown : H2-ERKIT-2 includes one H2-ERM and two H2-EBCs.
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
H2-ERKIT-2
Additionally, the Ethernet Remote I/O kits
are offered at a considerable savings
when compared to purchasing the
Ethernet Remote Master (ERM) and
Slaves (EBC) separately.
Kits are available starting as small as one
ERM (Master) and one EBC (Slave). The
Ethernet Remote I/O kits are offered in
both DL205 and Terminator I/O combinations to provide an easy way to choose
the Ethernet Remote I/O products that
best fit your application.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
=
+
+
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
H2-ERM
H2-EBC
H2-EBC
H2-ERKIT-x Ethernet Remote I/O Kits
Kit Number
H2-ERKIT-1
H2-ERKIT-2
H2-ERKIT-3
H2-ERKIT-4
H2-ERKIT-5
H2-ERKIT-6
H2-ERKIT-7
H2-ERKIT-8
H2-ERKIT-9
H2-ERKIT-10
Kit Contents
Enclosures
Price
1 H2-ERM + 1 H2-EBC
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 2 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 3 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 4 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 5 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 6 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 7 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 8 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 9 H2-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 10 H2-EBCs
<--->
PLC Products
Circuit
Protection
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
e5–53
Ethernet Remote I/O Kits
T12-ERKIT-x Ethernet
Remote I/O Kits
A T12-ERKIT-x Ethernet Remote I/O Kit
includes one H2-ERM Ethernet Remote
Master module and up to “x” number of
T1H-EBC Ethernet Base Controller
modules by adding -1, -2, -3, etc. as the
part number suffix. (See the table to the
right.)
A T12-ERKIT-2, shown below, includes
one H2-ERM and two T1H-EBC modules.
All other necessary hardware, including
the CPU, I/O modules, bases, cables and
Ethernet hub (if required), is sold separately.
T12-ERKIT-x Ethernet Remote I/O Kits
Kit Number
T12-ERKIT-1
T12-ERKIT-2
T12-ERKIT-3
T12-ERKIT-4
T12-ERKIT-5
T12-ERKIT-6
T12-ERKIT-7
T12-ERKIT-8
T12-ERKIT-9
T12-ERKIT-10
e5–54
Kit Contents
E-SW05U
(not included)
H2-ERM
T1H-EBC system
Example of an Ethernet remote I/O system using a T12-ERKIT-2.
CPU, bases, I/O modules, Ethernet hub, etc. are sold separately.
Example kit: T12-ERKIT-2 includes one H2-ERM and two T1H-EBCs.
Price
1 H2-ERM + 1 T1H-EBC
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 2 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 3 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 4 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 5 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 6 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 7 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 8 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 9 T1H-EBCs
<--->
1 H2-ERM + 10 T1H-EBCs
<--->
PLC Products
T1H-EBC system
T12-ERKIT-2
=
+
H2-ERM
+
T1H-EBC
T1H-EBC
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
Remote Master Specifications
Remote I/O
Master Module
D2-RMSM
<--->
Field I/O
Module Type
Intelligent device
Number of Masters per CPU
Two maximum for D2-240 and eight (seven + one CPU port) for the D2-250(-1) and
D2-260 (built-in master feature in D2-250(-1) and D2-260 bottom port can be used
as a master for RM-NET and would count as one master if used). D2-230 does not
support remote I/O.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
Maximum Number of
Channels
CPU dependent as above
Channel Capacity:
RM-NET
SM-NET
AC Motors
7
31
19.2K, 38.4K baud
Selectable (19.2K, 38.4K, 153.6K, 307.2, 614.4K baud)
Power
Transmiss.
Maximum # Slaves
Baud Rates
Channels may be split between RM-NET and SM-NET if necessary.
3,900 feet (1.2Km) @ 19.2 K or 38.4K baud
Transmission Distance
3,900 ft. (1.2Km)
AC Drives
Steppers/
Servos
1,968 feet (600m) @ 153.6K baud
Motor
Controls
984 feet (300m) @ 307.2K baud
328 feet (100m) @ 614.4K baud
Remote I/O
Slave Module
D2-RSSS
<--->
Communication to Slaves
Recommended Cable
Terminal Type
Operating Environment
Internal Power Consumption
Manufacturer
Proximity
Sensors
RS-485 via twisted pair with shield @ 38.4 Kbaud
Belden 9841 or equivalent - 120 ohm impedance, 12pF/ft
Photo
Sensors
Fixed
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
200 mA maximum
Koyo Electronics
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Remote Slave Specifications
Maximum Slave Points per
CPU
Overview
You can use remote I/O in addition to the
I/O in the local base. The remote master
is located in the CPU base and communicates with the remote slaves via shielded
twisted-pair cable. To use a remote I/O
system, you will need the following:
I/O Addresses Used
Terminal Type
Communications Port
Base Power Requirement
Operating Environment
Manufacturer
No remote I/O for D2-230
D2-240, D2-250(-1), D2-260 support a maximum of 2048 points per channel.
However, actual I/O available is limited by available I/O points and number of local
I/O being used. The D2-240 has a total of 320 X input, 320 Y outputs, and 256
control relays available to share between local and remote I/O. The D2-250(-1)
has a total of 512 X inputs, 512 Y outputs and 1024 control relays to share
between local and remote I/O.
The D2-260 has 1024 X inputs, 1024 Y outputs, 2048 control relays, 2048 GX
inputs and 2048 GY outputs to share between local and remote I/O points.
Pressure
Sensors
I/O modules in slave bases do not automatically consume any standard input and
output points. You select which points are consumed by setup instructions in your
RLL program.
Process
Fixed
RS-232, 9.6 Kbaud (same as top port on CPUs, SM-NET mode only)
200 mA maximum
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Remote Master
Remote Slave
Tools
Pneumatics
Remote slave
Communication port
(can be used for programming;
SM–NET mode only)
A D2-RSSS and I/O base must be used for
each slave.
Remote channel connector
Appendix
Remote channel
connector
The remote I/O points are updated asynchronously to
the CPU scan. For this reason, remote I/O applications should be limited to those that do not require
the I/O points to be updated on every scan.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Temp.
Sensors
Koyo Electronics
Remote master
One master can be used for each
channel. It can be a D2-RMSM, or the
bottom port on a D2-250-1 or D2-260
CPU. (The CPU port only supports
RM-NET.)
Limit
Switches
PLC Products
e5–55
Part Index
Serial Data Communications Module
Specifications
Data
Communications
Module
D2-DCM
<--->
Module Type
Modules per CPU
CPUs Supported
Intelligent
7 maximum, any slot except slot 0, CPU base only
D2-240 (firmware V1.8 or later), D2-250-1 and D2-260
RS-232/422 signal levels, DirectNET Master/Slave, K-sequence
or Modbus RTU Slave protocol, Baud rate selectable from 300
baud to 38.4 Kbaud, Odd or No parity, DirectNET HEX or ASCII
mode
Belden 9729 or equivalent (for RS-422)
Communications
Recommended Cable
Field Wiring Connector
Internal Power Consumption
25-pin D-shell connector
300 mA maximum at 5 VDC, (supplied by base power supply)
Operating Environment
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity
(non-condensing)
Manufacturer
Koyo Electronics
DCM as additional serial port
The D2-DCM Data Communications
Module is used primarily for three reasons:
• Extra communications port to connect a
PC, operator interface, etc.
• Network interface to DirectNET
• Network interface to a Modbus® network
using the RTU protocol
C-more HMI panel
Extra
communications port
If additional communication ports are
needed, they can easily be added by
installing DCM modules. This allows additional connections of devices, such as
operator interfaces, PCs, etc. Since the
DCM does not require any programming,
you can set the DCM communication
parameters, connect the cables, and start
transferring data. Make sure the device
has a DL205 compatible driver.
DirectNET
network interface
The DCM can be used as a network interface for applications requiring data to be
shared between PLCs, or between PLCs and
an intelligent device such as a host PC. The
DCM connects easily to DirectNET. This
network allows you to upload or download
virtually any type of system data including
Timer/Counter data, I/O information, and
V-memory
information
from
any
DirectLOGIC or compatible PLC. The DCM
allows the DL205 to function as a network
master or network slave.
e5–56
PLC Products
Master/Slave Network
Connect the DCM to
our MDM-TEL serial modem
(see the Communication
Products section for details
on the modem)
DCM as master
RS232 to RS422
Converter
D2–240 slave
D2–DCM slave
DL–405 CPU (bottom port)
D3–340 slave
Modbus RTU interface
The DCM can be used as a slave station
interface to connect your DL205 system to
a Modbus® network using the Modbus RTU
protocol. The host system must be capable
of issuing the Modbus commands to read
or write the appropriate data. Remember
that the bottom port on the D2-250-1 and
D2-260 CPUs can act as a Modbus master.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Serial Module for WinPLC and EBC Systems
Company
Info.
PLCs
Serial
Communications
Module for WinPLCs &
EBCs
H2-SERIO
<--->
Serial I/O module for
WinPLCs
Add serial ports to your WinPLC system
by simply plugging the H2-SERIO
modules into the DL205 I/O base. This
serial module is used exclusively with the
WinPLC. The WinPLC communicates with
the H2–SERIO module across the DL205
backplane.
Up to ten serial ports
on a WinPLC system
The WinPLC has one built-in serial port.
You can add as many as nine additional
serial ports for Think & Do Studio or
Think & Do Live! applications requiring
multiple serial devices, such as barcode
scanners. Connect to just about any
serial device that communicates ASCII
protocol. The H2-SERIO can also serve
as a Modbus RTU slave.
Processing large
amounts of serial data
with a WinPLC
Field I/O
H2-SERIO Specifications
Module Type
# of Serial Ports per Module
# of modules supported per WinPLC
# of modules supported per EBC node
Protocols Supported
Connector
Power Consumption
Operating Environment
Manufacturer
Intelligent module for use with H2–WPLC*-** or PC/EBC system
3
Software
C-more &
other HMI
3
3
AC Drives
Serial ASCII and Modbus RTU slave
AC Motors
RJ12 jack
210 mA @ 5 VDC
0 to 60°C (32°F to 140°F), 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Host Automation Products, L.L.C.
Separate
communications
parameters for each port
Using H2-SERIO
in a PC-based control
EBC system
Use Think & Do software packages to set
baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits
for each serial port. Choose from 300
baud to 57.6K baud communication
speeds. Think & Do Studio or Think & Do
Live! allows each port to be designated
as a Modbus slave or a generic serial
device. Each port on the H2–SERIO
module is capable of full hardware handshaking.
Think & Do Studio version 6.5 supports
the use of up to three H2-SERIO modules
per EBC node in a PC-based control
system. The master must be a PC running
Studio 6.5 or later. This does not apply to
a WinPLC system with an ERM module
used for remote I/O.
Easy
serial communications
The Think & Do features listed on this
page for the WinPLC (receiving and
manipulating data) also apply to a PC
running the Think & Do software.
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
All Think & Do PC control software products include advanced string and array
functions that make transmitting,
receiving and manipulating serial data a
snap.
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Pin Assignments for H2-SERIO ports
1
0V
Power (-) Connection (GND)
2
CTS
Clear to Send
3
RXD
Receive Data (RS-232)
4
TXD
Transmit Data (RS-232)
5
RTS
Request to Send
6
0V
Signal Ground (GND)
Power
Circuit
Protection
6
Enclosures
1
Tools
RJ12 (6P6C) Female Modular
Connector
Pneumatics
While the H2-SERIO module will support
virtually any serial device, processing
large amounts of serial data will increase
the system response time. This is important to consider when using multiple
H2-SERIO modules, especially in a
WinPLC local base with an H2-ERM or
H2-CTRIO.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Appendix
Part Index
PLC Products
e5–57
Ethernet Communications Modules
Ethernet
Communications
Module
H2-ECOM
<--->
H2-ECOM100 <--->
H2-ECOM-F <--->
H2-ECOM100 IBox
communications
instructions
can be used to monitor or update the
program in any DirectLOGIC PLC on the
network.
Simple connections
Over 25 Communications IBox instructions are available when using the H2ECOM100 with a DL250-1 or DL260 PLC
and DirectSOFT5 programming software.
These easy-to-use instructions allow you
to:
• Enable/disable module DHCP
• Read/write module IP, Gateway and
Subnet Mask addresses
• Read/write module ID, Name and
Description
• Send E-mail messages
• Read/Write PLC memory to networked
Hx-ECOM100 modules
• Read/Write PLC memory to networked
Hx-ECOM(-F) modules
See the following page for example
Communications IBox instructions.
Use Category 5 UTP cables or 62.5/125
ST-style fiber optic cables depending on
the requirements of your application.
Inexpensive UTP cables can be run up to
100 meters between nodes, and fiber
optic cables can be run up to 2,000
meters. Fiber optic cables virtually eliminate electrical noise problems. Use
repeaters to extend distances and expand
the number of nodes.
Our HA-TADP (10/100Base-T) PC network
adapter card and E-SW05U Ethernet switch
is compatible with the ECOM modules. See
the Communications Products section for
information on these items.
ECOM starter kit
Overview
Ethernet Communications Modules offer
features such as:
• High-speed peer-to-peer networking
of PLCs
• Fast updates with DirectSOFT Programming
Software
• High-performance access for Human
Machine Interface (HMI), ERP, MES or
other Windows-based software
• Industry standard Modbus TCP
Client/Server Protocol (H2-ECOM100)
• Free SDK for custom drivers
• Easy setup
The Ethernet Communication (ECOM)
Modules represent a price breakthrough
for high-speed peer-to-peer networking of
PLCs. No longer are you forced to designate a single PLC to be the network
master. Any PLC can initiate communications with any other PLC. Link your PLCs
with PCs using industry standard Modbus
TCP protocol connected through standard
cables, hubs, and repeaters. Or, use our
KEPDirect I/O Server to link to your
favorite HMI/SCADA, data historian, MES
or ERP software to DirectLOGIC PLCs. Our
LookoutDirect HMI and our DataWorx
data collection software include ECOM
drivers. DirectSOFT Programming Software
e5–58
PLC Products
The H2-ECOM-START gives you everything you need to make your first Ethernet
network simple to build. It contains an
H2-ECOM module and instruction
manual, a network adapter card (PCI) for
your PC, a crossover cable, and a
Software Product Showcase Demo CD.
The CD contains demo versions of our
software products that support the ECOM
Modules. See the Software Products
section for information on the available
software packages.
Message in
The
H2-ECOM100 supports the
Industry Standard Modbus TCP
Client/Server Protocol
Message is sent out
of port only connected to device
See the Communications
section for details on the
E-SW05U Ethernet Switch
Specifications
Communications
Data Transfer Rate
Link Distance
Ethernet Port
H2-ECOM
H2-ECOM100
H2-ECOM-F
10Base-T Ethernet
10/100Base-T Ethernet
10Base-FL Ethernet
10 Mbps max.
100 Mbps max.
10 Mbps max.
100 meters (328 ft)
100 meters (328 ft)
2,000 meters (6,560 ft)
RJ45
RJ45
ST-style fiber optic
Ethernet Protocols
TCP/IP, IPX
TCP/IP, IPX, Modbus TCP,
DHCP, HTML configuration
TCP/IP, IPX
Power Consumption
Manufacturer
450 mA @ 5VDC
300 mA @ 5 VDC
640 mA @ 5 VDC
Host Automation Products, L.L.C.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Ethernet Communications Modules
Modbus TCP support
Company
Info.
PLCs
Modbus TCP communications architecture
Field I/O
The H2-ECOM100 supports the industry
standard Modbus TCP Client/Server
protocol in addition to the standard IP and
IPX protocols. This allows the DL205 PLC
with an H2-ECOM100 module to serve
as a client (master) or as a server (slave)
on a Modbus TCP Ethernet network. The
H2-ECOM100 can actively issue Modbus
commands to other nodes or devices on
the Modbus TCP network or simply
respond to connected Modbus TCP
clients.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
PLC-to-PLC
communications
PLC-to-PLC or PLC to a Modbus TCP
device communications can be accomplished using standard Read from Network
(RX) and Write to Network (WX) instructions (DL240/250-1/260, all H2 series
ECOMs and all DirectSOFT versions). If
you’re using our new DirectSOFT5
programming software, a DL250-1 or
DL260 PLC and an H2-ECOM100, you
can use fill-in-the-blank IBox instructions
to simplify your communications programming. The H2-ECOM100 supports the
ECOM100 Configuration IBox for use
with the ECRX and ECWX IBox instructions
to read/write to other ECOM(100)s. All
H2 series ECOM modules support the
NETCFG Configuration IBox for use with
the NETRX and NETWX IBox instructions to
read/write to other ECOM modules
(remember DL250-1/260 and DSOFT5
required). The Communications IBox
instructions execute with built-in interlocking to greatly simplify communications
programming.
H2-ECOM100 has
e-mail capability!
Proximity
Sensors
ECOM100 Configuration IBox
NetEdit3 software
Photo
Sensors
ECOM100 Read Network IBox
NetEdit3 Software ships free with the
ECOM User Manual. Use NetEdit3 to
configure the ECOM modules for your
network. Flexible addressing allows you to
use your choice of protocols and identifying methods. Assign each module a
number or a name or both. You don’t
have to use an IP address, but you can if
it’s necessary for your network. NetEdit3
uses two protocols for PC-to-PLC communications: IPX and TCP/IP. The NetEdit3
screen displays all identifiers and troubleshooting information for each module
on the network. You can use NetEdit3 to
adjust parameters for PLC-to-PLC
communications by clicking on Advanced
Settings. The network identifiers can also
be
changed
from
DirectSOFT
Programming Software.
Choose your slot
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
ECOM100 Send EMail IBox
The
H2-ECOM100
Send
EMail
(ECEMAIL) IBox instruction allows the
module to behave as an e-mail client and
send an SMTP request to your SMTP
Server to send a specified e-mail message
to the e-mail addresses in the in IBox’s
To: field. The Body: field allows you to
embed real-time data in your e-mail
message. The DL50-1/260 CPU and
DirectSOFT5 are required to use the IBox
instructions.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
The ECOM modules plug into any I/O
slot (excluding slot 0) of any local DL205
I/O base. The module maintains identification data, descriptive information, and
communication parameters for PLC-toPLC communications in flash memory.
Disconnect power before installing or
removing any PLC module.
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
205
Appendix
CP U
Part Index
S lot 0
S lot 1
S lot 2
S lot 3
S lot 4
No!
Note: Use D2-240, D2-250, D2-250-1 or D2-260 CPUs
with the ECOM modules. The D2-230 CPU and D2-CM
bases do not support the ECOM modules.
PLC Products
e5–59
PROFIBUS™ Slave Base Controller
Specifications
PROFIBUS™ Slave
Base Controller
H2-PBC <--->
Module Location
Module Type
Maximum Expansion
CPU slot of any DL205 base
Communications
RS-485 PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS-DP.
Baud rate selectable from 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud.
Module Connectors
Internal Power Consumption
PROFIBUS 9-pin D-shell, RJ-12 serial (for configuration only*)
Operating Environment
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity
(non-condensing)
Manufacturer
Host Automation Products, L.L.C.
CPU device
126 stations, 32 stations per segment, 9 repeaters in a row
530 mA maximum at 5VDC (supplied by base power supply)
* The serial port is used only for configuration of the H2-PBC firmware.
The PROFIBUS Slave Base Controller also
offers the following:
Overview
If you are using a PROFIBUS™ controller
network, the DL205 I/O sub-system can
help reduce the cost of your overall application. The H2-PBC module allows the
micro-modular DL205 I/O sub-system to
be linked with a PROFIBUS master
controller. PROFIBUS is a control bus that
provides a common method to connect
automation equipment with devices on a
single network and significantly reduces
hardwiring costs. PROFIBUS provides
specifications for information exchanged
between nodes, such as controller data
associated with low level device and
configuration parameters that are individually related to system operations.
• Cost-effectiveness: Hardwiring cost is
reduced with a single network for
devices.
• Easy connectivity: Low-cost installation
is easy to implement and maintain.
• Diagnostics: Advanced error diagnostics
not commonly available in traditional
systems are supported.
• High baud rates: Baud rates bring
response time down to 10ms per device.
• LED indicators: Provide quick indication
of DL205 power and operating mode.
Please Note:
1. The PROFIBUS Slave Base Controller module
H2-PBC is a PTO-certified PROFIBUS-compliant
slave I/O interface product.
See www.profibus.com for more information.
2 For use with Think & Do Software, we recommend
the SST PROFIBUS PCI Master Card, part number
5136-PFB-PCI. (AutomationDirect does not provide
this interface).
See www.mysst.com for more information.
How it works
The H2-PBC module is a PROFIBUS slave,
which can be plugged into the CPU slot of
the DL205 micro-modular family of I/O
bases. The module reports all identification data, diagnostic information, and
parameters that control the module operation. The H2-PBC module scans and
reports all discrete and analog I/O data to
a PROFIBUS Master. The AC externallypowered DL205 I/O base units contain a
24 VDC, 0.3A power supply for simple
wiring of sensors and actuators into the
DL205 I/O modules, and for controlling
them with a PROFIBUS Master. Using our
Profibus I/O sub-system will increase
installation flexibility and save on wiring
costs. The H2-PBC module supports all
DL205 discrete and analog I/O modules
and the H2-CTRIO module.
e5–60
PLC Products
Connect our micro-modular DL205 I/O…
....
H2-PBC slave
H2-PBC slave
...with your PLC or PC-based
PROFIBUS Master.
The D2-INST-M Installation and PLC I/O User Manual covers information about DL205 I/O modules, power budgeting, and installation and wiring. This catalog does not cover CPU-slot controllers.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
PROFIBUS Slave Base Controller
Company
Info.
PLCs
Baud
Max. Segment Length
Max. Expansion
Feet
Meters
Feet
Meters
9.6 Kbps
3278
1,000
3,2786
1,0000
19.2 Kbps
3278
1,000
3,2786
1,0000
93.75 Kbps 3278
1,000
3,2786
1,0000
187.5 Kbps 3278
1,000
3,2786
1,0000
500 Kbps
1311
400
1,3114
4,000
1.5 Mbps
655
200
6,557
2,000
3 Mbps
327
100
3,270
1,000
6 Mbps
327
100
3,270
1,000
12 Mbps
327
100
3,270
1,000
Recommended Cables
Siemens
Belden
Field I/O
6XV1 830 0AH10
Software
3079A
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Proximity
Sensors
9-pin D-sub
female pin out
9-pin D-sub
male
Photo
Sensors
9-pin D-sub
male
Limit
Switches
6
7
8
9
9-pin Profibus connector
Pin 1 = shield
Pin 3 = B
Pin 8 = A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Encoders
To Profibus Master
Controller
Termination Style =
Reversed
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Profibus Cable
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Node Style = Reversed
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
ERNI ERbic connectors for
Profibus networks
ERNI ERbic connectors
ERNI ERbic connectors are available for the Profibus Base Controller.
They are available in node and termination reversed styles for DL205
and PC connections, horizontal or vertical cable entry, and termination
or daisy-chain configurations.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Part No.
Description
Device
104577
Profibus-certified reverse
node horizontal connector.
9-pin Male D-Sub
H2-PBC or any Profibus
ISA/PCI Personal Computer
Master/Slave Card
104322
Profibus-certified reversed
termination horizontal connector. 9-pin Male D-Sub
H2-PBC or any Profibus
ISA/PCI Personal Computer
Master/Slave Card
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Horizontal entry cable
Vertical entry cable
Contact A
Contact B
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
Shield tied bar
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Contact A
Contact B
PLC Products
e5–61
DeviceNet™ Slave Module
DeviceNet
Slave Module
™
wiring costs. The F2-DEVNETS-1 module
supports all DL205 discrete and analog
I/O modules.
F2-DEVNETS-1 <--->
Overview
If you are using a DeviceNet™ controller
network, the DL205 I/O sub-system will
help reduce the cost of your overall application. The F2-DEVNETS-1 (slave) module
allows the popular micro-modular DL205
I/O sub-system to be linked with a
DeviceNet master controller. DeviceNet is
a low-cost control bus that provides a
common method to connect automation
equipment with devices on a single
network. DeviceNet and it significantly
reduces hard wiring costs. The DeviceNet
standard provides specifications for information exchanged between nodes, such
as controller data associated with low level
device and configuration parameters individually related to system operations.
The DeviceNet slave module also offers:
• Cost effectiveness: Hardwiring cost is
reduced with a single network for
devices.
• Easy connectivity: Low-cost four wire
installation is easy to implement and
maintain.
• Innovative technology: Power is integrated into the device.
• Diagnostics: Advanced error diagnostics
not commonly available in traditional
systems are available.
• Highly dependable: Fast response and
high reliability are featured for
demanding applications.
• LED indicators: Provide quick indication
of DL205 power and operating mode.
F2-DEVNETS-1 Interface Specifications
Module Type
DeviceNet Compatibility
CPU device
Number of I/O
(256 inputs, 256 outputs max.) Defined by number of slots per base.
(1024 inputs, 1024 outputs max.) Defined by DeviceNet slave specifications
Module Location
Maximum Field Devices per bus
Node Address / CAN Baud Rate
CPU slot of any DL205 base
Communication to Field Devices
Standard 4-wire shielded cable to cabinet connector, molded 4-wire cable @
up to 500 Kbps to field devices
Module Connector
ODVA approved pluggable screw connector
Operating Environment
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity
(non-condensing)
Internal Power Consumption
Manufacturer
160 mA @ 5VDC
Predefined Group 2 Master/Slave communications.
64 (see table on next page)
Jumper selectable
FACTS Engineering
How it works
The F2-DEVNETS-1 module is a
DeviceNet slave, which can be plugged
into the CPU slot of the DL205 micromodular family of I/O bases. This module
maintains a database with all the identification data, diagnostic information, and
parameters that control the module operation. The F2-DEVNETS-1 module scans
and reports all discrete and analog I/O
data to a DeviceNet Master. The AC externally powered DL205 I/O base units
contain a 24 VDC, 0.3A power supply for
simple wiring of sensors and actuators into
the DL205 I/O modules, and for controlling them with a DeviceNet Master. Using
our DeviceNet I/O sub-system will
increase installation flexibility and save on
e5–62
PLC Products
Connect our micro-modular DL205 I/O…
....
F2-DEVNETS-1 Slave
F2-DEVNETS-1 Slave
...with your PLC
or PC-based
DeviceNet master.
The D2-INST-M Installation and PLC I/O User Manual covers information about DL205 I/O modules, power budgeting, and installation and wiring. This catalog does not cover CPU-slot controllers.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DeviceNet Slave Module
Company
Info.
PLCs
I/O base and network
considerations
All discrete and analog I/O modules are
supported by the F2-DEVNETS-1 slave
module. Choose your DL205 base(s) and
I/O modules using the the information in
this section.
DL205 Style of I/O Modules Supported
Field I/O
Discrete Types
Analog Types
4-point Input
4-channel Input
8-point Input
8-channel Input
16-point Input
2-channel Output
32-point Input
8-channel Output
AC Drives
4-point Output
4-channel In/ 2 channel Output
AC Motors
8-point Output
4-channel thermocouple
16-point Output (includes 12 pt)
4-channel RTD
Software
C-more &
other HMI
Power
Transmiss.
32-point Output
Steppers/
Servos
4-point Input/4 point Output
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
5
4
Limit
Switches
3
User supplied
120 ohm resisor
2
F2-DEVNETS-1
1
5
4
3
2
1
Encoders
V- ( b l a c k )
CAN L (blue)
Drain
CAN H (white)
V+(24V)(red)
Current
Sensors
DeviceNET cable
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Trunk Length
F2-DEVNETS-1 features
The F2-DEVNETS-1 module replaces the
F2-DEVNETS module and adds the
following enhancements:
• DIP Switch selectable node address and
CAN baud rate
• ODVA approved pluggable screw
connectors
• 1,024 inputs and 1,024 outputs as defined
by DeviceNet Slave specifications
(256 physical inputs and 256 physical outputs defined by the number of slots per
I/O base)
The F2-DEVNETS-1 can be used as a
direct replacement for the previous
F2-DEVNETS through a simple jumper
selection procedure.
Baud Rate
Branch Length
Devices
Feet
Meters
Bits/sec
Feet
Meters
328
100
500K
20
6
64
820
250
250K
20
6
64
1,640
500
125K
20
6
64
Process
Relays/
Timers
For other DeviceNet specifications, compatible products and latest DeviceNet information, contact:
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association
Contact: Executive Director Katherine Voss
Phone: 734/975-8840 • Fax: 734/922-0027
Internet address: http://www.odva.org
e-mail: [email protected]
ODVA, Inc. • 1099 Highland Drive, Suite A, Ann Arbor, MI. 48108
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Please Note:
Tools
1. The DeviceNet Slave module F2-DEVNETS-1 is
an ODVA certified DeviceNet-compliant slave
I/O interface product.
See www.odva.com for more information.
Pneumatics
Appendix
2. For use with Think & Do Software, we recommend
the SST DeviceNet PCI Master Card, part number
5136-DNP-PCI. (AutomationDirect does not provide this interface).
See www.mysst.com for more information.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Part Index
PLC Products
e5–63
Smart Distributed System (SDS) I/O
Smart Distributed
System Module
F2-SDS-1 <--->
SDS Master. The F2-SDS-1 module
supports all DL205 discrete and analog
I/O modules. The SDS also offers:
• Cost effectiveness: SDS offers inexpensive controller and industrial DL205 I/O
sub-system.
• Easy connectivity: SDS is a low-cost
wiring system that’s easy to implement
and maintain.
• Innovative technology: Power is integrated into the device.
• Diagnostics: SDS offers advanced error
diagnostics not commonly found in
traditional systems.
• High baud rates: Baud rate brings
response time down to 0.10ms per
device.
• LED indicators: Provides indication of
DL205 Smart Distributed System.
Overview
If you are already using or planning to
implement an SDS™ controller network,
using the F2-SDS-1 module and I/O subsystem can help reduce the cost of your
overall application. The Smart Distributed
System™ (SDS) provides a means to
connect automation equipment and
devices on a single network, which eliminates expensive hardwiring. This standard
communication media and software
provides a low-cost method for controllers
and devices to communicate low-level
data at high speeds. The SDS standard
provides specifications for information
exchange between nodes, as well as
device-level diagnostics not normally
found in other I/O systems. The F2-SDS-1
module allows the well-proven micromodular DL205 I/O system to be
controlled by your SDS master controller.
How it works
The F2-SDS-1 module plugs into the CPU
slot of any DL205 I/O base. The module
maintains a database with all identification data, diagnostic information, and
parameters that are configured within the
base and control the operation of the SDS
slave module and the I/O. The F2-SDS-1
slave will monitor and report discrete and
analog I/O module data to an SDS
Master. All AC externally powered DL205
I/O base units contain a 24 VDC, 0.3A
power supply for simple wiring of sensors
and actuators into the DL205 I/O
modules, and for controlling them with an
e5–64
PLC Products
F2-SDS-1 Interface Specifications
Module Type
Module Location
Number of I/O
Maximum Field Devices per Bus
Max SDS Addresses per CPU
CPU device
Communication to Field Devices
Standard 4-wire shielded cable to cabinet connector, molded 4-wire
cable @ up to 1Mbps to field devices.
Module Connector
Operating Environment
Internal Power Consumption
Manufacturer
5-position removable terminal (European style)
CPU slot of any DL205 base
Defined by number of slots per base
126 (see table next page)
8 discrete, 64 analog
0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
160 mA @ 5VDC
FACTS Engineering
Connect our micro-modular DL205 I/O…
....
F2-SDS-1 Slave
F2-SDS-1 Slave
...with your PLC or PCbased SDS master.
Ask for our D2-INST-M Installation and I/O Manual for complete information about DL205 I/O modules, power
budgeting, and installation and wiring. This catalog does not cover CPU-slot controllers.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
SDS I/O
Company
Info.
PLCs
DL205 Style of I/O Modules Supported
I/O base and network
considerations
All discrete (except 32-pt.) and analog I/O
modules are supported by the F2-SDS-1
slave module. Specialty modules are not
supported by the F2-SDS-1 module.
Discrete Types
Analog Types
Field I/O
4-point Input
4-channel Input
Software
8-point Input
8-channel Input
16-point Input
2-channel Output
4-point Output
4-channel In/ 2 channel Output
8-point Output
4-channel Temperature
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
16-point Output (includes 12 pt)
AC Motors
4-point Input/4 point Output
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
SDS B us Connection
Proximity
Sensors
11 to 25 VDC
Terminal Connector
SHIELD
BUS -BUS +
GND
DC+
120
5
4
3
2
1
Photo
Sensors
Power
S upply
Limit
Switches
D
Encoders
D
D
Current
Sensors
D
A BC DE
Pressure
Sensors
User S upplied
Temp.
Sensors
To SDS bus
Trunk Length
Baud Rate
Branch Length
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Devices
Feet
Meters
Bits/sec
Feet
Meters
75
22.8
1M
1
0.3
64
300
91.4
500K
3
0.9
126
600
182.8
250K
6
1.8
126
1,500
457.2
125K
12
3.6
126
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Other SDS specifications, compatible products, and latest SDS literature information are made available through:
Honeywell MICRO SWITCH Division
Internet: http://www.honeywell.com
e-mail:[email protected]
Power
Circuit
Protection
Comments to:
SDS Council, IL50/B4-523
Honeywell Micro Switch Division
11 West Spring Street
Freeport, IL 61032
Enclosures
Tools
Phone: (800)537-6945 • Fax: (815) 235-5623
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–65
CoProcessor Module
Features
Triple-port BASIC
CoProcessor
F2-CP128 <--->
Overview
The BASIC CoProcessor Module interfaces
the DL205 family of programmable
controllers with bar code readers, operator interface terminals, instrumentation
equipment, computers and other serial
devices.
BASIC CoProcessor
applications
BASIC CoProcessors are designed for use
with intelligent devices such as:
• Bar code readers
• Welders
• Board level controllers
• Serial printers
• Intelligent sensors
• Almost any device with an
RS-232/422/485 port
They are also good solutions for applications requiring complex math: such as,
floating point math, sine, cosine, tangent,
exponential, square roots, etc.
• FACTS Extended BASIC and ABM
Commander for Windows software for
IBM PCs makes program development
fast and simple. Allows online, fullscreen BASIC program editing and the
ability to upload / download programs
on disk. The CD-ROM includes Modbus
master and slave BASIC programs and
other application examples.
• Non-volatile memory of up to 128K
allows multiple program storage and
execution, DL205 register expansion,
and retentive data storage and retrieval.
• 26 MHz BASIC CoProcessor provides
fast program execution independent of
the CPU scan.
• Three buffered ports permit communication from the module to three external
devices.
• The module is programmable from port
1 or 2 for complete serial port utilization
without switching cables.
• A real-time clock/calendar maintains
time/date with battery backup when
power outages occur. Programmable
time based BASIC interrupts to 0.010 of
a second.
• Direct access of up to 254 bytes of
DL205 CPU memory per scan is
possible. No supporting ladder logic is
required.
• Floating point math solves complex
formulas to eight significant digits.
Example Application
Barcode scanner
e5–66
PLC Products
Scale
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
BASIC CoProcessor
Company
Info.
PLCs
Triple Port BASIC CoProcessor Module Specification
Field I/O
Module Type
CoProcessor, Intelligent
Modules per CPU
Seven maximum, any slot in CPU base (except slot zero)
Communication
256 character type-ahead input buffer on all ports. Ports are independently programmed by software. Seven or eight data bits, one or two
stop bits, even, odd, or no parity. XON/XOFF software flow control and RTS/CTS handshake.
AC Drives
F2-CP128
128K bytes of battery-backed RAM. 26MHz clock rate
Port 1: RS-232/422/485, 115.2 Kbaud maximum
Port 2: RS-232/422/485, 57.6 Kbaud maximum
Port3*: RS-232, 19.2 Kbaud max.
* Port 3 physically located in the same RJ12 jack as Port 1 (RS-232). Port 3 uses the RTS/CTS pins on that jack. If you use these lines for other purposes
(e.g. hardware handshaking on Port 1), then Port 3 cannot be used.
Programming /documentation software for IBM PCs comes standard.
Key features include:
• Shipped with each coprocessor module
• Runs under Windows 98/2000
• On-line full-screen BASIC program editing (similar to GW Basic, with industrial application enhancements added for easier programming)
• Internal Editor for block copy, block move, search and replace
• Text upload and download BASIC programs on disk
• Binary upload and download BASIC programs and data on disk
• Download control statement allows multiple programs to be downloaded and saved with one download file.
• CD includes Modbus master and slave BASIC programs and other application examples
Steppers/
Servos
Field Termination
Four RJ12 jacks: Port 1/3 RS-232, Port 2 RS-232, Port 1 RS-422/485, Port 2 RS-422/485
Limit
Switches
Power Consumption
235 mA @ 5VDC
Operating Environment
0ºC - 60ºC (32ºF - 140ºF), 5% to 95% humidity (non-condensing)
Manufacturer
FACTS Engineering
ABM Commander for Windows
(CD included with module)
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–67
DL205 High-Speed Counter I/O Module
CTRIO features
.
HIgh-Speed
Counter I/O
Module
H2-CTRIO <--->
Overview
The High-Speed Counter I/O (CTRIO)
module is designed to accept high-speed
pulse-type input signals for counting or
timing applications, and is designed to
provide high-speed pulse-type output
signals for stepper motor control, monitoring, alarm or other discrete control
functions. The CTRIO module offers great
flexibility for applications that call for
precise counting or timing, based on an
input event or for high-speed control
output applications.
The CTRIO module has its own microprocessor and operates asynchronously
with respect to the PLC/Controller. This
means that the on-board outputs respond
in real time to incoming signals so there is
no delay waiting for the PLC/Controller to
scan I/O.
The CTRIO modules offer the following
I/O features:
• Eight DC sink/source inputs, 9-30 VDC
• Four isolated sink/source DC outputs,
5-36 VDC, 1A per point
Inputs supported:
• Two quadrature encoders up to 100 kHz,
or 4 single channel counters up to 100 kHz
using module terminals Ch1A, Ch1B, Ch2A
and Ch2B
• High-speed edge timers, dual edge timers,
pulse catch, count reset, count inhibit or
count capture or home search limits using
module terminals Ch1C, Ch1D, Ch2C or
Ch2D
Outputs supported:
• Four independently configurable highspeed discrete outputs or 2 channels
pulse output control (20 Hz - 25 kHz per
channel)
• Pulse and direction or cw/ccw pulses supported for pulse output control
• Raw control of a discrete output directly
from user control program
Software Configuration
All scaling and configuration is done via
CTRIO Workbench, a Windows software
utility program. This eliminates the need
for PLC ladder programming or other
interface device programming to
configure the module. CTRIO Workbench
runs under Windows 98/2000/XP and NT
4.0 SP5 or later.
CTRIO Workbench main configuration screen
Typical applications
• High-speed cut-to-length operations using
encoder input
• Pick-and-place or indexing functions for
controlling a stepper or servo drive
• Dynamic registration for web material
control
• Accurate frequency counting for speed
control with onboard scaling
• PLS (Programmable Limit Switch) functions for high-speed packaging, gluing, or
labeling
• Sub 10 µsec pulse-catch capability for
high-speed product detection
• Functions for level or flow
Supported systems
Multiple CTRIO modules can reside in the
same base provided that the backplane
power budget is adequate. Depending
which CPU/interface module is used,
there may be I/O base slot restrictions for
the CTRIO module. Refer to the
CTRIO High-Speed Counter Manual
(HX-CTRIO-M) for I/O slot restrictions.
DirectLOGIC DL205 PLC
You can use the H2-CTRIO module with
the D2-240, D2-250(-1) and D2-260
CPUs. (It is not supported in local expansion bases or in D2-RSSS serial remote
I/O bases.)
DL205 Win PLC
The H2-CTRIO module can be used in
DL205 WinPLC systems (H2-WPLC*-**).
PC-based Ethernet I/O
control systems
The H2-CTRIO module can be used in
PC-based control systems using the
H2-EBC interface module
The H2-CTRIO module is designed to
work with incremental encoders or other
field devices that send pulse outputs
ERM to EBC systems
The H2-CTRIO module is supported in
H2-EBC slaves in H*-ERM systems. This
includes the supported DL205 CPUs and
WinPLC systems.CTRIOs consume 96
inputs and 96 outputs when used in
ERM/EBC expansion bases.
Profibus systems
Use Configure I/O dialog to assign
the CTRIO input and output functions
e5–68
PLC Products
The H2-CTRIO module can be used in
Profibus systems using the H2-PBC slave
interface module.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 High-Speed Counter
Company
Info.
PLCs
I/O Specifications
Field I/O
Software
General
Module Type
Modules Per Base
I/O Points Used
Field Wiring Connector
Internal Power Consumption
Operating Environment
Manufacturer
Isolation
C-more &
other HMI
Intelligent
Limited only by power consumption
None, I/O map directly in PLC V-memory or PC control access
AC Drives
Standard removable terminal block
400mA Max at +5V from Base Power Supply, Maximum of 6 Watts
(All I/O in ON State at Max Voltage/Current)
32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C), Humidity (non-condensing) 5% to 95%
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Host Automation Products, L.L.C.
Steppers/
Servos
2500V I/O to Logic, 1000V among Input Channels and All Outputs
Motor
Controls
H2-CTRIO Input Specifications
8 pts sink/source 100 kHz
max.
Inputs
Minimum Pulse
Width
Input Voltage Range
Maximum Voltage
Input Voltage
Protection
Rated Input Current
Minimum ON
Voltage
Maximum OFF
Voltage
Minimum ON
Current
Maximum OFF
Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
5 µsec
9-30 VDC
30 VDC
Zener Clamped at 33 VDC
8 mA typical 12mA maximum
9.0 VDC
2.0 VDC
5.0 mA (9 VDC required to
guarantee ON state)
2.0 mA
Less than 3 µsec
Less than 3 µsec
Proximity
Sensors
H2-CTRIO Output Specifications
Outputs
4 pts, independently isolated, current sourcing or sinking
FET Outputs: open drain and source with floating gate drive
Voltage range
Maximum voltage
Output clamp voltage
Maximum load current
Maximum load voltage
Maximum leakage
current
Inrush current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
ON state V drop
External power supply
Overcurrent protection
Thermal shutdown
Overtemperature reset
Duty cycle range
Configurable Presets
a) single
b) multiple
5 VDC - 36 VDC
36 VDC
60 VDC
1.0 A
36 VDC
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
100 µA
Pressure
Sensors
5 A for 20 ms
less than 3 µsec
less than 3 µsec
0.3 V max.
for loop power only, not required for internal module function*
15 A max
Tjunction = 150°C
Tjunction = 130°C
1% to 99% in 1% increments (default = 50%)
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
a) each output can be assigned one preset, or
b) each output can be assigned one table of presets, one table can contain max. 128 presets, max. predefined tables = 255
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
* User supplied power source required for stepper drive configuration.
Power
Circuit
Protection
H2-CTRIO Output Resources
H2-CTRIO Input Resources
Counter/Timer 4, (2 per 4 input channel group)
Resource
Options
1X, 2X, or 4X Quadrature, Up or
Down Counter, Edge Timer, Dual
Edge Timer, Input Pulse Catch, Reset,
Inhibit, Capture
Timer Range / 4.2 billion (32 bits); 1 µsec
Resolution
Counter Range
Enclosures
Pulse output / Discrete outputs Pulse outputs: 2 channels (2 outputs each channel) Discrete outputs: 4 pts.
Resource Options
Target Position Range
Pulse outputs: pulse/direction or cw/ccw; Profiles:Trapezoid, S-Curve,
Symmetrical S-Curve, Dynamic Position, Dynamic Velocity, Home Search,
Velocity Mode, Run to Limit Mode and Run to Position Mode
Discrete outputs: 4 configurable for set, reset, pulse on, pulse off, toggle,
reset count functions (assigned to respond to Timer/Counter input functions).
Raw mode: Direct access to discrete output from user application program
± 2.1 billion (32 bits or 31 bits + sign bit)
± 2.1 billion
(32 bits or 31 bits + sign bit)
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–69
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
DL205 High-Speed Counter
LED Diagnostic Definitions
Status indicators
H2-CTRIO LED Descriptions
OK
ER
1A
2A
0-3
Module OK
User Program Error
H2-CTRIO LED Diagnostic Definitions
LED OK
LED ER
ON
Description
OFF
All is well - RUN Mode
Hardware Failure
Channel 1 Status
ON
ON
Channel 2 Status
Blinking
Blinking
Output Status
Blinking
OFF
OFF
Blinking
OFF
ON
Module Error Due to Watchdog Timeout
OFF
OFF
No Power to Module
Boot Mode - Used for Field OS Upgrades
Program Mode
Module Self-diagnostic Failure
H2-CTRIO LED Diagnostic Definition
1A/2A
Blinking 7 times per second
Input is configured as Counter and is changing
Following state of input
Input is not configured as counter
0-3
Follow actual output state: ON = output is passing current
Installation and wiring
The H2-CTRIO module has two independent input channels, each consisting of 4 optically isolated input
points (pts. 1A-1D on common 1M and pts. 2A-2D on common 2M). The inputs can be wired to either sink
or source current.
The module has 4 optically isolated output points (pts. Y0-Y3 with isolated commons C0-C3, respectively).
The outputs must be wired so positive current flows into Cn terminal and then out of the Yn terminal (see the
diagram on the following page).
Remember that the internal jumpers can be used to connect the input commons or outputs/output commons
together.
The module is configured, using CTRIO Workbench, to accommodate
the user’s application. The function of each input (counting, timing,
reset, etc.) and output (pulse output, discrete output, etc.) is defined in
the configuration of the module.
1A
1B
2B
1C
2A
2C
2B
1D
Notes:
2C
2D
-
L
NC
+
-
–
+
Y0
C3
–
+
Y3
1A
1B
1C
1D
1M
NC
C0
Y0
C1
Y1
C1
L
Y3
–
Y2
L
C3
+
C2
C0
Y2
–
2M
C2
+
+
2D
2M
+
3. Outputs have one polarity only and are powered by user-provided
5-36 VDC power sources. The maximum allowable current per output
circuit is 1A.
–
+
–
L
-
+
+
- +
2. Polarity of the input power sources can be reversed. Consideration
must be given, however, to the polarity of the field device. Many field
devices are designed for only one polarity and can be damaged if
power wiring is reversed.
1M
–
+
-
1. Inputs (1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D) require user-provided
9-30 VDC power sources. Terminals 1M and 2M are the commons for
Channel 1 and Channel 2 inputs. Maximum current consumption is
12 mA per input point.
PLC Products
IN 9-30VDC 5-12mA
OUT 5-36VDC
1.0A max
per point
2A
See the notes below for further details about power source considerations, circuit polarities, and field devices.
e5–70
CTR
+24VDC
IN
OUT PUTS
OK
0
1
ER
C1
2
3
C TR 2
H2--CTRI O
–
+
Y1
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 High-Speed Counter
Company
Info.
PLCs
Solid state input wiring
device
Pulse output schematic
Field I/O
Software
DC type field devices are configured to
either sink or source current. This affects
the wiring of the device to the CTRIO
module. Refer to the sinking/sourcing
appendix in this catalog for a complete
explanation of sinking and sourcing
concepts.
Cn (where n=0, 1, 2, 3)
CTRIO
Output
+5 to 36VDC
AC Drives
AC Motors
Yn
Power
Transmiss.
+
Load
Steppers/
Servos
-
NPN Field Device (sink)
C-more &
other HMI
Motor
Controls
This drawing illustrates wiring that is
typical for Channel 1 terminals 1A, 1B,
1C, and 1D. The same circuitry is also
present at the corresponding
Channel 2 terminals.
Proximity
Sensors
+
Load
-
Photo
Sensors
+5 to 36VDC
1A
Sensing Circuit
Cn (where n=0, 1, 2, 3)
CTRIO
Output
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Yn
Current
Sensors
24VDC
- +
Pressure
Sensors
1M
Temp.
Sensors
The same circuitry is present at the
corresponding Channel 2 terminal.
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
PNP Field Device (source)
24VDC
Relays/
Timers
Sensing Circuit
This drawing illustrates wiring that is
typical for Channel 1 terminals 1A, 1B,
1C, and 1D. The same circuitry is also
present at the corresponding
Channel 2 terminals.
+
Stepper/Servo drive
wiring example
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
1A
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
1M
Part Index
The same circuitry is present at the
corresponding Channel 2 terminal.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–71
DL205 High-Speed Counter
CTRIO Workbench configure I/O setup
Fill-in-the-blank
configuration software
The CTRIO Workbench is the software utility used to configure the
CTRIO module and to scale signals to desired engineering units.
Workbench also allows you to perform various other functions,
such as switching between the CTRIO’s Program mode and Run
mode, monitoring I/O status and functions, and diagnostic control
of module functions. The CTRIO Workbench utility ships with the
CTRIO User Manual. You can also download the latest version
free at the Host Engineering’s Web site: www.hosteng.com.
The Configure I/O dialog is the location where input and output
functions are assigned to the module. The choice of input and
output functions determines which options are available. The
input function boxes prompt you with selections for supported
functions. The Workbench software automatically disallows any
unsupported configurations.
CTRIO Workbench main configuration screen
Select modules from multiple
networked PLCs
Save and load configurations
with Read/Write File feature
H2-CTRIO
Configure I/O screen
Detailed snap-shot of module
status and configurations
CTRIO Workbench diagnostics and monitoring
The Monitor I/O dialog is accessible from the main Workbench
dialog when the module is in Run Mode. This allows for a convenient way to test and debug your configuration prior to installation.
The Monitor I/O dialog is divided into three functional areas: Input
Functions, Output Functions and System Functions. The data
displayed under the Input Functions tab includes all input Dword
parameters, status bits and the current status of each configured
input and output function. The fields displayed under the Output
Functions tab includes all output (D)word parameters and configuration information that can be altered during runtime and the bits
that indicate successful transfers or errors. The System Functions
can be used to read from or write to the CTRIO’s internal registers.
Monitor I/O screen
CTRIO Workbench on-board scaling
Scaling raw signals to engineering units is accomplished
using the Scaling Wizard. The Scaling Wizard options are
different for the Counter functions as compared to the Timer
functions. “Position” and “Rate” scaling are available when
you select a Counter function. “Interval” scaling is available
when you select a Timing function.
Scaling Wizard screen
Monitor I/O dialog included
for easy de-bug features
e5–72
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 High-Speed Counter
Company
Info.
PLCs
High-speed input operations
High-speed counting
The CTRIO module is capable of a wide variety of highspeed input and output operations, all within one
module. With its flexible 2-channel input and separate
2-channel output design, the CTRIO can satisfy highspeed counting, timing, and pulse catch operations,
along with high-speed discrete output or several profile
choices of pulse output operations. Not all combinations of input functions and output functions are
possible within the resources of the module, but the
following examples are some of the most common
applications for the CTRIO. Check out these examples
and see how they relate to your high speed application
needs.
The CTRIO can be configured for counting functions for the
use of an encoder input (up to two quadrature encoders per
module), with available connections for external reset,
capture and inhibit signals. In a simple cut-to-length application as shown, the encoder provides an input position reference for the material to the module. The module's high-speed
outputs are wired to the cutting device and to the clutch
and/or braking device. When the count from the encoder is
equal to a pre-programmed setpoint within the module, the
high-speed outputs are activated to stop and cut the material
to a repeatable fixed length. Additionally, the clutch/brake
signal can be used as an inhibit signal so counts are not
accumulated while the material is being cut.
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
High-speed timing
High-speed cut-to-length application
The CTRIO can be configured for timing functions
based on both count or rate. Using a common configuration of a proximity switch sensing the teeth on a gear,
the module is able to calculate the velocity of the gear
based on the rate it receives its counts. This value can
be scaled within the module to the engineering units
required for the application.
Photo
Sensors
PLC with CTRIO module
Motor
Interface
Limit
Switches
Motor
control
lines
Encoders
Gearbox, clutch and
brake interface
High-speed timing application
CTRIO highspeed output
Encoder
Cutter interface
PLC with CTRIO module
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Gear
Cutter assembly
Material to be
cut to length
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Proximity switch
Photoelectric switch
Using Configure I/O screen to configure
CTRIO for high-speed counting
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
High-speed edge timing application
Enclosures
Using Configure I/O screen to configure CTRIO for high-speed timing
Point-click selections of
hardwired connection for Counting,
Reset, and Inhibit
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Powerful edge timing functions clicking on the edge button cycles through the
available edge timing functions available
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Part Index
PLC Products
e5–73
DL205 High-Speed Counter
Pulse output operations
PLC with CTRIO module
Using Edit Pulse Profile screen to select Trapezoid pulse output profile
Fill spout
CTRIO pulse output signals
Stepper or
servo drive
Fill-in-the-blank parameters
allow precise tuning of the output
pulse profile
Pulse output for stepper/servo control
The CTRIO module is capable of multiple configurations for
pulse output control, most often when connected to a stepper
or servo drive system. The module can deliver a pulse output
signal up to a maximum of 25 kHz on two channels with
support for pulse-and-direction or CW/CCW pulses. The
available profile choices include Trapezoid, S-Curve,
Symmetrical S-Curve, Dynamic Positioning, Dynamic
Velocity, free form and Home Search. All profiles can be
easily configured using the CTRIO Workbench software with
fill-in-the-blank parameter fields and a graphic representation of the selected profile. Three additional profiles are
available that are completely controlled by the user program
(no CTRIO profile is configured). They are Velocity Mode,
Run to Limit Mode, and Run to Position Mode.
Example application
In a simple rotary indexing application, as shown above, a
fixed Trapezoid profile is chosen. The CTRIO for this application is wired to a stepper drive for pulse-and-direction. The
requirement for this application is to provide a smooth movement of the rotary table to allow product to be filled into individual containers at an equal distance apart. The
predetermined number of pulses required for each movement is entered into the CTRIO Workbench as "Total Pulses"
along with the Starting Frequency, Ending Frequency, and
Positioning Frequency (speed after acceleration). The
Acceleration and Deceleration parameters are entered in
units of time, so no ramp-distance calculations are required.
After all parameters are entered, a graphical representation
of the configured profile is shown automatically. Once the
configuration has been downloaded to the module, all that is
needed from the PLC CPU is for the Enable Output signal to
begin a movement.
Stepper
motor
Stepper motor
inside housing
Circular turn table
Rotary indexing liquid fill application
Other common pulse output applications:
• S-Curve accel/decel profile for signaling a stepper or servo drive
that needs a curved acceleration and deceleration profile, i.e. for
diminishing any initial “jerk” upon movement of static products,
boxes on conveyors, liquids in containers on an indexer, printing
registrations, etc.
• Dynamic Positioning for any run-to-a-specific-position requirement, either by a pre-programmed count of an external highspeed discrete input wired to the module. This is popular in
winding or web control with any dynamic registration mark or
variable speed requirement.
• Home search routines to seek a home position based on CTRIO
discrete input limit(s).
Example of S-Curve acceleration and deceleration pulse output profile
Calculate Profile displays
graphical representation of output
pulse profile
e5–74
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 High-Speed Counter
Combining high-speed input and
pulse output operations
Company
Info.
PLCs
Multihead drill machine application
Field I/O
Software
Using CTRIO Workbench to configure the module
for simultaneous high-speed input and highspeed pulse output operation
Proximity switch
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
Proximity switch
Proximity switch
AC Motors
Encoder
Stepper motor
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
PLC with CTRIO module
Photo
Sensors
Stepper or
servo drive
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
High-Speed inputs and pulse output
combinations
The flexible design of the CTRIO module allows for
combining high-speed inputs and delivering high-speed pulse
outputs signals simultaneously. There are limitations to this
type of configuration in that the module does not internally
support closed loop control. Providing closed loop control
with the CTRIO involves additional PLC code to coordinate
this control, making the application subject to the PLC CPU
program scan. Simple position/speed monitoring via a highspeed counting input for non-critical response, while
providing pulse outputs to a drive, is easily achievable for the
CTRIO.
PLC CPU program
Pressure
Sensors
Example application
In the simple drill-head application shown above, the CTRIO
pulse outputs are wired to a stepper and/or servo drive. The
inputs are wired to an encoder attached to the lead screw on
the movable portion of the drill-head assembly. The CTRIO
module output pulse train to the drive allows the motor to spin
the lead screw, making the drill move forward into the passing
material. The encoder monitors the speed and position of the
drill-head. Prox switches at each end act as limit switches
ensuring the drill-head will not over-travel. A home sensor is
positioned in the middle of the assembly which allows the PLC
to reset the count.
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
CTRIO pulse output profile
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Closed loop control for the CTRIO module requires PLC
CPU program interaction to close the loop. This makes the
application subject to the PLC CPU scan.
Appendix
Part Index
CTRIO high-speed input pulse train
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–75
Counter Interface Module
Counter Interface Module Features
Counter
Interface Module
D2-CTRINT <--->
Overview
The D2-CTRINT offers several modes of
operation that can be used to solve simple
motion and high-speed machine control
applications.
Module Points
Mode
Input 0
Mode 10: Two
High Speed Up Up counter 1
Counters
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Up counter 2
Filtered input
Reset counter 1 Reset counter 2
Input 4
Not used
Mode 20: One Phase A input Phase B input
Counter reset
Up/Down or
(up count)
(down count)
Quadrature cntr
Filtered input
Not used
Mode 30:
Pulse Output
Filtered input
Not used
CW pulse output
(or Pulse output)
CCW pulse out
(or Direction)
Mode 40:
External
Interrupts
Interrupt input
(not available Interrupt input
when using
timed interrupt)
Interrupt input
Interrupt input
Not used
Mode 50:
Pulse Catch
Inputs
Pulse input
Pulse input
Pulse input
Pulse input
Not used
Mode 60:
Filtered Input
Filtered input
Filtered input
Filtered input
Filtered input
Not used
Filtered input
The high-speed input features cannot be used if the pulse output features are in use, and vice versa.
Input specifications
Output specifications
The operating modes and module configuration are explained in detail in the D2CTRIF-M High Speed Counter Manual. The
high-speed input features cannot be used if
the pulse output features are in use, and
vice versa. Only one D2-CTRINT can be
used per CPU and the module must reside
in slot 0, next to the CPU. A brief description
of each high-speed mode is listed below:
Input
4 pts. sink/source 5 kHz
max.
Output
2 pts., current sinking
5kHz Max
Minimum pulse width
100 µSec
Voltage range
5.0 VDC±15%
Input Voltage Range
12 or 24 VDC ±15%
Maximum voltage
5.5 VDC
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
30 mA
Rated input current
10 mA Typical
13 mA Maximum
Maximum load
current
Minimum ON voltage
8.0 VDC
Mode 10: Up to two 5 kHz high-speed
counters offer 24 presets each. When the
preset is reached, a CPU interrupt routine is
executed. The D2-240, D2-250-1 and D2260 support 2 channels, and the D2-230
supports 1 channel (max. count:
9,999,999).
Maximum OFF voltage
1.0 VDC
Minimum ON Current
8.0 mA
Mode 20: Quadrature encoder input
(up/down) for clockwise and counterclockwise position control supported by the D2240/250-1/260 (max. pulse range:
-8,388,608 to 8,388,607).
Mode 30: Pulse outputs are programmable
to follow a predetermined profile. An
external interrupt can be used in conjunction with separate acceleration and deceleration profiles for positioning and velocity
control supported by D2-240/250-1/260
(max. pulse range: -8,388,608 to
8,388,607 at 5K pulses per second max).
Mode 40: Four external interrupt inputs can
be used for an immediate response for
high-priority events. The D2-240, D2-2501 and D2-260 supports 4 interrupts, and
the D2-230 supports 1 interrupt.
e5–76
PLC Products
Minimum load voltage 4.5 VDC
Leakage current
Less than 0.1 mA at
5.5 VDC
Inrush current
0.5A (10 mS)
Less than 30 µS
Maximum OFF Current
1.0 mA
OFF to ON Response
OFF to ON Response
Less than 30 µS
On to OFF Response
Less than 30 µS
ON to OFF Response
Less than 30 µS
External power supply
5.0 VDC ±10%
Mode 50: Pulse catch feature allows the
CPU to read 4 inputs, each having a pulse
width as small as 0.1ms. When an input
pulse is detected, the input is set ON for
the next scan and then resets. Supported
by all DL205 CPUs.
Mode 60: Input filters are configurable
(0-99ms) to ensure input signal integrity.
The default input mode is a 10ms filter.
The D2-240, D2-250-1 and D2-260
supports 4 pulse inputs, and the D2-230
supports 1 pulse input.
Mode 40 option - A Timed interrupt can
be configured for time critical events.
Interrupt 0 can be scheduled on a 3ms999ms cycle. See the next page for more
information on the timed interrupt.
General specifications
Module Type
Discrete
Modules per CPU
One only in slot adjacent to
CPU
I/O Points Used
8 inputs, 8 outputs
Field Wiring
Connector
Standard 8 pt. removable terminal block
Internal Power
Consumption
50 mA from 5VDC max., (supplied by the CPU base power
supply)
Operating
Environment
32ºF to 140ºF
(0ºC to 60ºC) humidity (noncondensing) 5% to 95%
Manufacturer
Koyo Electronics
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Counter Interface Module
Company
Info.
PLCs
Wiring Diagram for Modes 10, 20, 40, 50 and 60
Field I/O
Wiring Diagram for Mode 30
Software
V+
0
12--24
V DC
C0
1
12--24
V DC
0
12--24
V DC
V+
C1
12--24
V DC
V+
To LE D 2
C2
L
L
To LE D C W
To LE D C C W
V+
3
To LE D 3
Power
Transmiss.
C3
CW
S tepper Drive
C4
AC Motors
To LE D 2
C2
S tepper Drive
To LE D 3
C3
No input
V+
C1
V+
AC Drives
To LE D 1
2
No input
4
No input
V+
1
3
12--24
V DC
To LE D 0
C0
To LE D 1
2
12--24
V DC
C-more &
other HMI
V+
To LE D 0
4
CCW
To LE D C W
C4
To LE D C C W
5V DC
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Timed Interrupt feature
There is an internal timed interrupt feature
available in the D2-240/250-1/260
CPUs. You do not need the Counter
Interface module to use the timed interrupt. This cyclical interrupt allows you to
easily program a time-based interrupt that
occurs on a scheduled basis. The CPU’s
timed interrupt operates in a similar
manner to the external interrupt input, but
instead of the interrupt subroutine being
triggered by an external event, it is now
triggered by a cyclical interval of time. This
interval can be programmed from 3 ms to
999 ms. Whenever the programmed time
elapses, the CPU immediately suspends its
routine scan cycle and jumps to interrupt
subroutine INT 0. As with the other
modes, when the subroutine execution is
complete, the CPU automatically resumes
its routine scan cycle starting at the exact
location where it was interrupted. Since
the CPU scan time and the interrupt time
interval are different, the program gets
interrupted at various points in the execution over time. The CPU returns to the
point where it left to resume the program
execution.
Current
Sensors
Timed interrupt specifications
Timed interrupts
One (internal to CPU)
Time interval
3 to 999 ms
(1 ms increments)
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Interrupt Subroutine INT0
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Timed interrupt operation
Comm.
Interrupt occurs
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Normal
Program
Power
Circuit
Protection
END
Subroutine
Interrupt
INT0
Time
Interval
Time
Interval
Time
Interval
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Return
Part Index
If you use a timed interrupt and the
Counter Interface module, Input 0 cannot
be used on the Counter Interface module.
If you’re using the timed interrupt and a
standard discrete input module, then there
are no limitations.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–77
Wiring System for DL205 PLCs
Cut PLC wiring time to minutes instead of hours
The ZIPLink wiring system eliminates the normally tedious process of wiring PLC I/O to
terminal blocks. Simply plug one end of a ZIPLink pre-wired terminal block cable into your I/O
module and the other end into a ZIPLink connector module. It’s that easy. ZIPLinks use half
the space, at a fraction of the total cost of terminal blocks.
ZIPLinks are available in a variety of styles to suit your needs, including fused, relay and
sensor/LED connector modules. ZIPLinks are available for all DL205 Series PLC discrete and
analog input and output modules.
For complete information see ZIPLinks in the Terminal Blocks and Wiring Solutions section.
Specify your ZIPLink system
Use the Compatibility Matrix table below:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Locate the I/O module part number.
Locate Connector Module Type. (Feedthrough Module, Fuse Module, etc...)
Select the cable length by replacing the # symbol with: Blank = 0.5m, -1 = 1.0m, -2 = 2.0m1
1
Note: Cable part number denotes compatibility between Connector Module and I/O Modules.
ZIPLink Wiring System Compatibility Matrix for DL205 PLCs
Step 2: Connector
Feedthrough Modules
Module Type
ZL-RTB40
Step 1: I/O
Number of ZL-RTB20
Module
Terminals Step 3: Cables
Fuse Modules
ZL-RFU20
ZL-RFU40
Relay
Modules
Sensor Input Modules
ZL-RRL16-24
ZL-LTB16-24
ZL-LTB32-24
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D24-CBL40# ZL-D24-CBL40#P
ZL-D24-CBL40# ZL-D24-CBL40#P
Pigtail Cable
Inputs
I/O Module
D2-08ND3
D2-16ND3-2
D2-32ND3
D2-32ND3-2
D2-08NA-1
D2-08NA-2
D2-16NA
10
19
40
40
10
10
19
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
Outputs
D2-04TD1*
D2-08TD1
D2-08TD2
D2-16TD1-2
D2-16TD2-2
D2-32TD1
D2-32TD2
D2-08TA
F2-08TA
D2-12TA
D2-04TRS*
D2-08TR
F2-08TRS*
F2-08TR**
D2-12TR
10
10
10
19
19
40
40
10
10
19
10
10
19
10
19
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D24-CBL40#P
ZL-D24-CBL40#P
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D24-CBL40#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
Combo In/Out
D2-08CDR
10
ZL-D2-CBL10#
*Caution: The D2-04TD1, D2-04TRS, and F2-08TRS outputs are derated not to exceed 2 Amps per point and 2 Amps per common when used with the
ZIPLink wiring system.
**The F2-08TR outputs are derated not to exceed 2 Amps per point and 4 Amps per common when used with the ZIPLink wiring system.
ZIPLink Connector Modules specifications begin on page 26-56
ZIPLink Cables specifications begin on page 26-74
e5–78
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Wiring System for DL205 PLCs
Company
Info.
PLCs
Field I/O
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Locate the I/O module part number.
Locate Connector Module Type. (Feedthrough Module, Fuse Module, etc...)
Select the cable length by replacing the # symbol with: Blank = 0.5m, -1 = 1.0m, -2 = 2.0m1
1
Note: Cable part number denotes compatibility between Connector Module and I/O Modules.
Software
C-more &
other HMI
ZIPLink Wiring System Compatibility Matrix for DL205 PLCs Continued
Step 2: Connector Module Feedthrough Modules
Type
ZL-RTB40
Step 1: I/O
Number of ZL-RTB20
Module
Terminals Step 3: Cables
AC Drives
Fuse Modules
Relay
Modules
Sensor Input Modules
ZL-RFU20
ZL-RRL16-24
ZL-LTB16-24
ZL-RFU40
ZL-LTB32-24
Pigtail
Cable
I/O Module
Analog
F2-04AD-1
F2-04AD-1L
F2-08AD-1
F2-04AD-2
F2-04AD-2L
F2-08AD-2
F2-02DA-1
F2-02DA-1L
F2-02DAS-1
F2-08DA-1
F2-02DA-2
F2-02DA-2L
F2-02DAS-2
F2-08DA-2
F2-4AD2DA
F2-8AD4DA-1
F2-8AD4DA-2
F2-04RTD*
F2-04THM*
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
19
10
10
10
10
10
19
19
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL10#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
ZL-D2-CBL19#
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
ZL-D2-CBL19#P
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
*The F2-04RTD and F2-04THM modules are not supported by the ZIPLink wiring system. These modules require wire specific to the signal type.
ZIPLink Connector Modules specifications begin on page 26-56
Process
ZIPLink Cables specifications begin on page 26-74
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–79
DC Input Modules
D2-08ND3 DC Input
<--->
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
8 (sink/source)
Input Current
4.0 mA @ 12 VDC
8.5 mA @ 24 VDC
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
3.5 mA
D2-16ND3-2 DC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
10.2-26.4 VDC
26.4 VDC
9.5 VDC minimum
3.5 VDC maximum
N/A
2.7 k
1.5 mA
50 mA
1 to 8 ms
1 to 8 ms
Removable, D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65 g)
2 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)
20-28 VDC
30 VDC (10 mA)
19 VDC minimum
7VDC maximum
N/A
3.9 k
6 mA @ 24 VDC
3.5 mA
1.5 mA
100 mA
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable, D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65 g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Derating Chart
Points
<--->
16 (sink/source)
Derating Chart
Points
8
16
6
12
8
4
2
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
0
32
12--24VDC
- +
Source
Sink
+
Internally
connected
C
-
C
0
1
2
3
D2--08ND3
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
IN
4
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 ° F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
24 VDC
Source
Sink
-
+
+
-
IN
CA
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16ND3--2
24
VDC
4
5
6
7
0
4
10.2--26.4VDC
4--12mA
20--28VDC
8mA
CLASS2
1
5
0
C
4
2
1
3
0
5
6
24 VDC
Source
Sink
+
+
CB
1
6
3
2
3
7
7
Internal module circuitry
D2--08ND3
INP UT
0
5
2
6
V+
NC
4
1
2
Internal module circuitry
3
0
5
7
2
NC
-
1
3
1
7
4
2
0
6
C
3
CA
4
5
6
7
CB
4
5
6
7
V+
INP UT
To LE D
-
Sink
-
Source
COM
- +
12--24VDC
For “Sinking and Sourcing Concepts”, see the Appendix section.
e5–80
+
+
+
-
COM
Sink
To LE D
Optical
Is olator
PLC Products
Source
COM
Optical
Is olator
24 VDC
For “Sinking and Sourcing Concepts” see the Appendix section.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DC Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-32ND3 DC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
1
<--->
D2-32ND3-2 DC Input
Field I/O
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
32 (sink/source)
4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)
20-28 VDC
30 VDC
19 VDC minimum
7 VDC maximum
N/A
4.8 k
8.0 mA @ 24 VDC
32 (Sink/Source)
4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)
4.50 to 15.6 VDC min. to max.
16 VDC
25 mA
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable 40-pin Connector
1
Module Activity LED
2.1 oz. (60 g)
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
1
AC Drives
2 VDC maximum
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
4 mA @ 5 VDC
11 mA @ 12 VDC
14 mA @ 15 VDC
Steppers/
Servos
16 mA @ 15.6 VDC
Motor
Controls
3 mA
Proximity
Sensors
0.5 mA
25 mA
Photo
Sensors
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable 40-pin connector1
Module activity LED
Current
Sensors
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Derating Chart
32
Pushbuttons/
Lights
16
0
Sink
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
Source
-
Sink
+
+
-
24VDC
Sink
+
+
24VDC
-
0
32
Source -
Sink
+
+
-
24VDC
Source -
+
-
24VDC
Source
Sink
+
-
Internal module circuitry
A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV
V+
IN
ACT
24
VDC
A4
A5
A6
A7
CI
B4
B5
B6
B7
CII
C4
C5
C6
C7
CIII
D4
D5
D6
D7
CIV
Relays/
Timers
Source
D2--32ND3
A0
A1
A2
A3
CI
B0
B1
B2
B3
CII
C0
C1
C2
C3
CIII
D0
D1
D2
D3
CIV
Process
5-15VDC
Comm.
Sink
5-15VDC
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Source
Sink
Power
5-15VDC
Source
Circuit
Protection
Sink
Enclosures
5-15VDC
Tools
Source
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
22--26VDC
4--6mA
CLAS S 2
INP UT
To Logic
Source
+ -
COM
Optical
Is olator
24 VDC
+
Sink
Limit
Switches
Encoders
2.1 oz (60 g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Points
C-more &
other HMI
4 VDC minimum
1.0 k @ 5-15 VDC
Maximum Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
1.5 mA
Software
N/A
Input Current
3.5 mA
<--->
For “Sinking and Sourcing Concepts”, see the Appendix section.
For “Sinking and Sourcing Concepts” see the Appendix section.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–81
Simulator/AC Input Modules
F2-08SIM Input Simulator
Inputs per Module
Base Power Required 5VDC
Terminal Type
Status Indicator
Weight
IN
D2-08NA-1 AC Input
<--->
8
50 mA
None
Switch side
2.65 oz. (75 g)
SIM
0
1
2
3
F 2--08SI M
0
4
5
6
7
<--->
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
8
Input Current
13 mA @ 100 VAC, 60 Hz
11 mA @ 100 VAC, 50 Hz
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
5 mA
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
80-132 VAC
132 VAC
75 VAC minimum
20 VAC maximum
47-63 Hz
12 k @ 60 Hz
2 mA
50 mA
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.5 oz. (70 g)
> ON
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
1
2
3
4
5
Derating Chart
Points
8
80-132 VAC
6
4
IN
2
6
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
0
32
7
110 VAC
0
1
2
3
D2--08NA--1
110
VAC
4
5
6
7
Internally
connected
C
80-132VAC
10-20mA
50/60Hz
C
0
4
C
5
0
6
1
C
1
2
4
3
5
7
2
6
Internal module circuitry
3
7
V+
D2--08NA-1
INP UT
To LE D
COM
Line
Optical
Is olator
110 VAC
COM
e5–82
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
AC Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-08NA-2 AC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
<--->
Field I/O
8
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
170-265 VAC
265 VAC
150 VAC minimum
40 VAC maximum
47-63 Hz
18 k @ 60 Hz
9mA @ 220 VAC, 50 Hz
11 mA @ 265 VAC, 50 Hz
10 mA @ 220 VAC, 60 Hz
12 mA @ 265 VAC, 60 Hz
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Atmosphere
Vibration
Shock
Insulation Withstand Voltage
Insulation Resistance
32ºF to 131ºF (0º to 55ºC)
Noise Immunity
NEMA 1,500V 1 minute
SANKI 1,000V 1 minute
RFI
150 MHz, 430 MHz
Software
-4ºF to 158ºF (-20ºC to 70ºC)
35% to 95% (non-condensing)
C-more &
other HMI
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
AC Drives
MIL STD 810C 516.2
AC Motors
1,500 VAC 1 minute (COM-GND)
Power
Transmiss.
10M s 500 VDC
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
10 mA
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
2 mA
100 mA
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Limit
Switches
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
Encoders
2.5 oz. (70 g)
Current
Sensors
Derating Chart
Points
8
Pressure
Sensors
170-265 VAC
Temp.
Sensors
6
4
220VAC
2
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Internally
connected
C
Process
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
0
32
C
Relays/
Timers
0
4
Comm.
5
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
1
Internal module circuitry
V+
2
Power
6
INP UT
3
To LE D
COM
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
7
Tools
Optical
Is olator
220VAC
Pneumatics
COM
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–83
AC Input Modules
D2-16NA AC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
<--->
16
2 (isolated)
80-132 VAC
132 VAC
70 VAC minimum
20 VAC maximum
47-63 Hz
12 k @ 60 Hz
11 mA @ 100 VAC, 50 Hz
13 mA @ 100 VAC, 60 Hz
15 mA @ 132 VAC, 60 Hz
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
5mA
2mA
100 mA
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.4 oz. (68g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Derating Chart
Points
16
Note: When used with the ZIPLink wiring
system, relay outputs are derated not to
exceed 2 Amps per point max.
80-132 VAC
12
8
IN
4
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
110 VAC
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16NA
110
VAC
4
5
6
7
CA
0
4
80--132VAC
10--20mA
50/60Hz
1
5
2
6
0
7
1
3
110 VAC
2
NC
CB
3
0
4
NC
1
5
0
2
6
1
7
2
3
3
CA
4
5
6
7
CB
4
5
6
7
Internal module circuitry
V+
D2--16NA
INP UT
To LE D
COM
Optical
Is olator
110 VAC
e5–84
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DC Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-04TD1 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Output Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
<--->
Field I/O
4 (current sinking)
8 points (only first 4 pts. used)
1 (4 I/O terminal points)
NMOS FET (open drain)
10.2-26.4 VDC
40 VDC
0.72 VDC maximum
N/A
External DC Required
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
24 VDC @ 20 mA max.
Fuses
4 (1 per point)
(6.3 A slow blow, non-replaceable)
4A/point
60 mA
Software
1 ms
C-more &
other HMI
1 ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
AC Drives
Logic side
AC Motors
2.8 oz. (80 g)
Power
Transmiss.
Max Load Current (resistive) 8A/common
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Minimum Load Current
Points
Steppers/
Servos
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
0.1 mA @ 40 VDC
6A for 100 ms, 15A for 10 ms
50 mA
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Derating Chart
Inductive Load
Maximum Number of Switching Cycles per Minute
2A / Pt.
4
Load
Current
3
3A / Pt.
2
1
OUT
4A / Pt.
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
12--24
VDC
10.2--26.4VDC
50mA--4A
24VDC
+
Internally
connected
0V
24V
C
+24V
C
12--24VDC +
C
0
L
C
L
C
L
1400
300
140
90
70
---
600
120
60
35
----
Find the load current you expect to use and the duration that the
output is ON. The number at the intersection of the row and column represents the switching cycles per minute. For example, a
1A inductive load that is on for 100 ms can be switched on and off
a maximum of 60 times per minute. To convert this to duty cycle
percentage use: (duration x cycles)/60. In this example,
(60 x .1)/60 = .1, or 10% duty cycle.
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
24VDC
-- +
Reg
C
3
L
8000
1600
800
540
400
270
200
At 40 mS duration, loads of 3.0A or greater cannot be used.
2
L
C
1
Duration of output in ON s tate
100ms
7ms
40ms
At 100 mS duration, loads of 2.0A or greater cannot be used.
C
2
L
0
L
C
1
L
0.1A
0.5A
1.0A
1.5A
2.0A
3.0A
4.0A
0
1
2
3
D2--04TD1
0
0
32
Motor
Controls
Power
0V
3
To LE D
Circuit
Protection
Output
D2--04TD1
L
12--24 +
VDC --
6.3A
Optical
Is olator
Enclosures
Tools
Common
Pneumatics
Other
Circuits
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–85
DC Output Modules
D2-08TD1 DC Output
<--->
D2-08TD2 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
8 (current sinking)
Fuses
1 per common
5A fast blow, non-replaceable
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NPN open collector
10.2-26.4 VDC
40 VDC
1.5 VDC maximum
N/A
0.5 mA
0.3A/point; 2.4A/common
0.1 mA @ 40 VDC
1A for 10 ms
100 mA
1ms
1ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible with
this I/O module.
8 (current sourcing)
Fuses
1 per common
5A fast blow, non-replaceable
1
PNP open collector
12 to 24 VDC
10.8 to 26.4 VDC
40 VDC
1.5 VDC
N/A
N/A
0.3A per point; 2.4A per common
1.0 mA @ 40 VDC
1A for 10 ms
100 mA
1ms
1ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.1 oz. (60g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
Derating Chart
Points
<--->
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Output Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
8
6
4
OUT
2
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
12--24VDC
+
Internally
connected
C
C
0
1
2
3
D2--08TD1
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
10.2--26.4VDC
0.2mA-0.3A
0
L
C
4
L
C
1
L
5
L
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
0
L
1
5
7
L
4
2
6
3
Internal module circuitry
L
7
Optical
Is olator
OUTP UT
D2--08TD1
+
12--24VDC
COM
5A
COM
e5–86
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DC Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-16TD1-2 DC Output
<--->
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
External DC required
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
16 (current sinking)
Max Load Current
0.1A/point
1.6A/common
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
D2-16TD2-2 DC Output
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NPN open collector
24 VDC ±4V @ 80 mA max
10.2-26.4 VDC
30 VDC
0.5 VDC maximum
N/A
0.2 mA
150 mA for 10 ms
200 mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65g)
None
<--->
Field I/O
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
16 (current sourcing)
0.2 mA
Power
Transmiss.
Max Load Current
0.1A/point
1.6A/module
Steppers/
Servos
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
Software
2
NPN open collector
C-more &
other HMI
10.2-26.4 VDC
30 VDC
AC Drives
1.0 VDC maximum
AC Motors
N/A
Motor
Controls
150 mA for 10 ms
200 mA
Proximity
Sensors
0.5 ms
Photo
Sensors
0.5 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Limit
Switches
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
Encoders
None
Current
Sensors
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Derating Chart
Points
Pushbuttons/
Lights
16
12
8
Process
4
OUT
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
C
0
L
4
L
1
L
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
5
L
10.2--26.4
VDC 0.1A
CLASS2
2
L
6
L
A
3
L
0
1
7
L
12--24VDC
+
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16TD1--2
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
24VDC
+
+V
C
0
L
4
L
1
L
5
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
7
L
Internally
connected
2
3
+V
0
1
2
3
+V Internal module circuitry
B
Power
C
Circuit
Protection
4
5
Enclosures
6
7
Tools
C
4
Pneumatics
5
6
Appendix
7
Part Index
+
24VDC
L
+
OUTP UT
Optical
Is olator
12--24
VDC
COM
COM
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–87
DC Output Modules
D2-32TD1 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
External DC Power Required
1
<--->
D2-32TD2 DC Output
32 (current sinking)
4 (8 I/O terminal points)
NPN open collector
12-24 VDC
30 VDC
0.5 VDC maximum
0.2 mA
0.1A/point; 3.2A per module
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
150 mA for 10 ms
350 mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
removable 40-pin connector
1
Module activity (no I/O status indicators)
2.1 oz. (60g)
None
20-28 VDC max. 120 mA (all points on)
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
e5–88
PLC Products
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
1
<--->
32 (current sourcing)
4 (8 I/O terminal points)
Transistor
12 to 24 VDC
30 VDC
0.5 VDC @ 0.1A
0.2 mA
0.1A/point; 0.8A/common
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
150 mA @ 10 ms
350 mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable 40-pin connector1
Module activity (no I/O status indicators)
2.1 oz (60g)
None
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DC Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
NOT SUPPORTED IN D2-230, D2-240 AND D2-250 CPUS.
NOT SUPPORTED IN D2-230, D2-240 AND D2-250 CPUS.
F2-16TD1P DC Output with Fault Protection <--->
Inputs per module
Outputs per module
Commons per module
Output type
Operating voltage
Peak voltage
AC frequency
ON voltage drop
Overcurrent trip
Maximum load current
Maximum OFF current
Base power required 5V
OFF to ON response
ON to OFF response
Terminal type
Status indicators
Weight
Fuses
External DC required
External DC overvoltage
shutdown
16 (status indication)
16 (current sinking)
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NMOS FET (open drain)
10.2 -26.4 VDC, external
40 VDC
N/A
0.7 V (output current 0.5A)
0.6 A min., 1.2 A max.
0.25 A continuous, 0.5 A peak
Jumper J6 installed: 200 A; J6 removed: 30 A
70 mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable (D2-16IOCON)
Logic Side
2.0 oz. (25g)
None
24 VDC /10% @ 50 mA
27 V, outputs are restored when voltage is within
limits
8
4
4
0V
0
L
4
L
6
L
A 0
1
2
B 3
F2–16TD1P
A
3
L
7
L
24VDC
+
0V
0
L
4
L
0
1
24V
12–24VDC
+
Internally
connected
1
L
5
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
7
L
24V Internal module circuitry
12-24
VDC
4
5
6
7
AC Motors
N/A
Power
Transmiss.
0.7 V (output current 0.5A)
0.6 A min., 1.2A max.
Steppers/
Servos
0.25 A continuous, 0.5A peak
Jumper J6 installed: 200 A; J6 removed: 30 A
70 mA
0.5 ms
Removable (D2-16IOCON)
Photo
Sensors
Logic Side
2.0 oz. (25g)
None
Limit
Switches
24 VDC /10% @ 50 mA
Encoders
27 V, outputs are restored when voltage is within
limits
0
12–24VDC
V1
0
L
4
L
5
6
L
0V
7
L
24VDC
+
0
1
24V
0V
2
0
L
4
L
3
1
L
24V
5
L
0V
A
3
L
7
2
L
0
6
L
1
3
L
7
2
L
6
B
7
A 0
1
2
B 3
F2–16TD2P
3
24VDC
– +
12-24
VDC
4
5
6
7
10.2-26.4
VDC 0.25A
CLASS2
2
L
5
2
Pushbuttons/
Lights
1
L
4
1
Temp.
Sensors
OUT
6
24V
B
24V
0V
12–24VDC
+
0V
0V
CPU
Firmware Required
D2-250-1 Version 4.80 or later
D2-260 Version 2.60 or later
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
V1
4
Circuit
Protection
5
6
Enclosures
7
0V
Tools
4
5
Pneumatics
6
7
Appendix
Part Index
Optical
Isolator
V1
L
VDC
Relays/
Timers
Reg
Optical
Isolator
+ 12–24
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
10
20
30
40
50 55°C
50
68
86
104 122 131°F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F)
0
32
5
3
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
0.5 ms
0
+
OUTPUT
40 VDC
Process
4
2
3
24VDC
AC Drives
0.25A
10.2-26.4
VDC 0.25A
CLASS2
2
L
10.2 -26.4 VDC, external
L
5
L
C-more &
other HMI
NMOS FET (open source)
Derating Chart
1
L
Software
1
+
OUT
10
20
30
40
50 55°C
50
68
86
104 122 131°F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F)
0
32
Field I/O
16 (current sourcing)
12
8
0
16 (status indication)
Points
16
Derating Chart
0.25A
12
Inputs per module
Outputs per module
Commons per module
Output type
Operating voltage
Peak voltage
AC frequency
ON voltage drop
Overcurrent trip
Maximum load current
Maximum OFF current
Base power required 5V
OFF to ON response
ON to OFF response
Terminal type
Status indicators
Weight
Fuses
External DC required
External DC overvoltage
shutdown
<--->
Module detects the following faults:
1. Missing external 24 VDC
2. Open load
3. Over temperature
4. Over load current
Module detects the following faults:
1. Missing external 24 VDC
2. Open load
3. Over temperature
4. Over load current
Points
16
F2-16TD2P DC Output with Fault Protection
When the A/B switch is in the A position,
the LEDs display the output status of the
module’s first 8 output points. Positon B
displays the output status of the module’s second group of 8 output points.
L
Note: This module does not currently support Think & Do
8.0. It does not support Think & Do Live! or Studio.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
When the A/B switch is in the A position,
the LEDs display the output status of the
module’s first 8 output points. Positon B
displays the output status of the module’s second group of 8 output points.
OUTPUT
CPU
Firmware Required
D2-250-1 Version 4.80 or later
D2-260 Version 2.60 or later
PLC Products
e5–89
AC Output Modules
D2-08TA AC Output
<--->
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
8
ON Voltage Drop
< 1.5 VAC (>0.1A)
< 3.0 VAC (<0.1A)
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
47 to 63 Hz
Max Leakage Current
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
SSR (Triac)
15-264 VAC
264 VAC
F2-08TA AC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
10 mA
0.5A/point; 4A/common
4mA (264 VAC, 60 Hz)
1.2 mA (100 VAC, 60 Hz)
0.9 mA (100 VAC, 50 Hz)
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
10 mA for 10 ms
Fuses
1 per common, 6.3A slow blow replaceable order D2-fuse-3
250 mA
1ms
1ms + 1/2 cycle
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Peak One Cycle Surge Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
<--->
8
2 (Isolated)
SSR (Triac with zero crossover)
24-140 VAC
140 VAC
1.6 V(rms) @ 1.5A
47 to 63 Hz
50 mA
1.5A / pt @ 30ºC
1.0A / pt @ 60ºC
4.0A / common; 8.0A / module @ 60ºC
0.7 mA(rms)
15A
250 mA
0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle
0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
3.5 oz.
None
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
Derating Note: All outputs can be run at the
current per point shown.
e5–90
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
AC Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-12TA AC Output
<--->
Field I/O
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
12
ON Voltage Drop
< 1.5VAC (>50mA)
< 4.0VAC (<50mA)
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
47 to 63 Hz
Software
16 (four unused, see chart below)
2 (isolated)
C-more &
other HMI
SSR (Triac)
15-132 VAC
AC Drives
132 VAC
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
10 mA
0.3A/point; 1.8A/common
Motor
Controls
2mA (132 VAC, 60 Hz)
10A for 10 ms
Proximity
Sensors
350 mA
Photo
Sensors
1ms
1ms + 1/2 cycle
Limit
Switches
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
Encoders
2.8 oz. (80g)
Current
Sensors
(2) 1 per common
3.15A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-1 (5 per pack)
Fuses
Pressure
Sensors
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Temp.
Sensors
Note: When used with the ZIPLink wiring
system, relay outputs are derated not to
exceed 2 Amps per point max.
Points
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Derating Chart
250mA / Pt.
P oints
12
Yn+0
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
300mA / Pt.
9
OUT
6
3
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
15--132 VAC
L
L
L
L
L
L
15--132 VAC
L
CA
L
L
15--132VAC
10mA--0.3A
50/60 Hz
0
4
1
0
5
1
NC
2
2
CB
4
1
5
0
1
2
Relays/
Timers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
5
Internal module circuitry
CB
Tools
Optical
Is olator
L
Pneumatics
To LE D
4
Appendix
5
3
2
Us ed?
4
OUTP UT
NC
Yn+10
Yn+11
Yn+12
Yn+13
Yn+14
Yn+15
Yn+16
Yn+17
n is the starting address
NC
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CA
COM
Part Index
NC
3
L
18--110
VAC
4
5
3
3
L
L
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--12TA
Addres s es Us ed
P oints
Us ed?
NC
D2--12TA
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
15--132
VAC
3.15A
PLC Products
e5–91
Relay Output Modules
D2-04TRS Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
<--->
4
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
8 (only 1st 4pts. are used)
Voltage & Load Current
Type of Load
1A
4 (isolated)
5-30 VDC / 5-240 VAC
30 VDC, 264 VAC
0.72 VDC maximum
47 to 63 Hz
3A
4A
At 100 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 3A cannot be used.
10 mA
At 220 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.
4A/point; 8A/module (resistive)
0.1 mA @ 264 VAC
5A for < 10 ms
250 mA
10 ms
10 ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80 g)
1 per point
6.3A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
Fuses
2A
24 VDC Resistive
500k
200k
100k
50k
24 VDC Solenoid
100k
40k
––
–
110 VAC Resistive
500k
250k
150k
100k
110 VAC Solenoid
200k
100k
50k
–
220 VAC Resistive
350k
150k
100k
50k
220 VAC Solenoid
100k
50k
––
––
At 24 VDC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.
Relay, form A (SPST)
Derating Chart
Points
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
4
2A /
Pt.
3
3A /
Pt.
4A /
Pt.
2
1
0
OUT
RELAY
10
50
0
32
20
30
40
68
86
104
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
50 55 ˚ C
122 131 ˚ F
0
1
2
3
D2--04TR S
5-240VAC
4A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
10mA--4A
NC
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
NC
NC
C0
C0
0
L
C1
1
L
C2
2
L
C3
3
L
e5–92
PLC Products
Internal module circuitry
NC
L
C1
L
C2
L
C3
L
0
OUTP UT
L
1
To LE D
2
3
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
6.3A
D2--04TR S
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Relay Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-08TR Relay Output
<--->
Field I/O
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
8
Max Inrush Current
Output: 3A for 10 ms
Common: 10A for 10 ms
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
250 mA
Fuses
One 6.3A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
8
Voltage/Load
1 (2 I/O terminals)
24 VDC Resistive
24 VDC Solenoid
110 VDC Resistive
110 VDC Solenoid
220 VAC Resistive
220 VAC Solenoid
Relay, form A (SPST)
5-30 VDC; 5-240 VAC
30 VDC, 264 VAC
Current
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
Closures
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
N/A
Power
Transmiss.
47 to 60 Hz
5mA @ 5VDC
Steppers/
Servos
1A/point; 4A/common
0.1 mA @265 VAC
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
12 ms
10 ms
Limit
Switches
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
Encoders
3.9 oz. (110g)
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Temp.
Sensors
Note: When used with the ZIPLink wiring
system, relay outputs are derated not to
exceed 2 Amps per point max.
Derating Chart
Points
Pushbuttons/
Lights
8
0.5A / Pt.
OUT
0
1
2
3
D2--08TR
RELAY
6
4
5
6
7
4
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
1A / Pt.
2
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
0
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
Internally
connected
C
5-240VAC
1A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1A
C
C
0
L
L
1
L
Circuit
Protection
L
1
4
Tools
Internal module circuitry
5
Pneumatics
2
2
6
L
6
L
L
Power
Enclosures
0
5
L
L
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
C
L
4
0
32
3
Appendix
OUTP UT
L
3
Part Index
7
7
To LE D
D2--08TR
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
6.3A
PLC Products
e5–93
Relay Output Modules
F2-08TRS Relay Output
<--->
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
8
Output Type
3, Form C (SPDT)
5, Form A (SPST normally open)
Operating Voltage
7A @ 12-28 VDC, 12-250 VAC
0.5A @ 120VDC
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
150 VDC, 265 VAC
Typical Relay Life1 (Operations) at Room
Temperature
8
Voltage &
Type of Load 2
8 (isolated)
Load Current
50mA 5A
7A
24 VDC Resistive
10M
600k
300k
24 VDC Solenoid
150k
75k
110 VDC Resistive
–
600k
300k
110 VDC Solenoid
–
500k
200k
220 VAC Resistive
–
300k
150k
220 VAC Solenoid
–
250k
100k
1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with the
use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User
Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not
have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a
24 VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the
relay.
N/A
47 to 63Hz
10mA @ 12 VDC
7A/point 3 (subject to derating)
N/A
2) At 120 VDC 0.5A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.
12A
3) Normally closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling
capability of the normally open contacts.
670 mA
15 ms (typical)
Derating Chart
5ms (typical)
8
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
4A/
pt.
6
5.5oz. (156g)
None
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
5A/pt.
Number
Points On 4
(100% duty
2
cycle)
6A/
pt.
7A/pt.
0
0
32
OUT
NO 0
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
L
C1
C0
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 1
L
NC 0
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
normally clos ed
L
C2
C3
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 2
NO 3
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
L
C4
C5
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 4
NC 6
Typical Circuit
(points 1,2,3,4,5)
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO
L
C0
C2
NO 2
NC 6
Typical Circuit
(P oints 0, 6, & 7 only)
C3
NO 3
NO 5
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NC 7
C6
NC 7 normally clos ed
L
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 6
NO 7
PLC Products
NO 6
Internal Circuitry
Common
C6
C7
NO7
L
L
L
Internal Circuitry
Common
NC 0
C5
L
C7
e5–94
NO 1
4
5
6
7
NO 0
NO 4
NO 5
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
12--250VAC
7A50/60Hz
12--28VDC
10ma--7A
C4
L
normally clos ed
L
RELAY
0
1
2
3
F 2--08TR S
C1
L
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
NO
NC
L
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Relay Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-08TR Relay Output
Typical Relay Life1 (Operations)
at Room Temperature
<--->
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
8
Operating Voltage
7A @ 12-28 VDC, 12-250VAC;
0.5A @ 120 VDC
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
150 VDC, 265 VAC
Voltage & Type of Load 2
8
50 mA
2 (isolated), 4-pts. per common
Software
Load Current
5A
7A
24 VDC Resistive
10M
600k
300k
24 VDC Solenoid
150k
75k
110 VDC Resistive
–
600k
300k
110 VDC Solenoid
–
500k
200k
220 VAC Resistive
–
300k
150k
220 VAC Solenoid
–
250k
100k
1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with
the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User
Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not
have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a
24 VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the
relay.
8, Form A (SPST normally open)
N/A
47 to 63Hz
10 mA @ 12 VDC
3
(subject to derating)
Max Load Current (resistive) 10A/point
Max of 10A/common
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
Field I/O
2) At 120 VDC 0.5A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
3) Normally closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling
capability of the normally open contacts.
N/A
C-more &
other HMI
Proximity
Sensors
12A
670 mA
Photo
Sensors
15 ms (typical)
Limit
Switches
5ms (typical)
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Derating Chart
Logic side
Encoders
2.5 A/pt.
8
5.5 oz. (156g)
None
6
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
3 A/pt.
Number
Points On 4
(100% duty
2
cycle)
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
5A/pt.
10 A/pt.
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
0
0
32
OUT
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122 131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
RELAY
0
1
2
3
F 2--08TR
12--250VAC
10A50/60Hz
12--28VDC
10ma--10A
Typical Circuit
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
Internal Circuitry
Circuit
Protection
Common
Enclosures
NO 0
NO 1
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
4
5
6
7
L
L
Process
NO
L
Tools
C0-3
L
L
L
L
Pneumatics
NO 2
NO 3
Appendix
NO 4
NO 5
Part Index
C4-7
L
NO 6
NO 7
L
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–95
Relay Output Modules
D2-12TR Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
12
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
<--->
16 (four unused, see chart below)
2 (6-pts. per common)
Relay, form A (SPST)
5-30 VDC; 5-240 VAC
Voltage/Load
Current
Closures
24 VDC Resistive
24 VDC Solenoid
110 VDC Resistive
110 VDC Solenoid
220 VAC Resistive
220 VAC Solenoid
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
30 VDC; 264 VAC
N/A
47 to 60 Hz
Addresses Used
5mA @ 5VDC
1.5 A/point; Max of 3A/common
Points
Used?
Points
Used?
0.1 mA @ 265 VAC
Yn+0
Yes
Yn+10
Yes
Max Inrush Current
Output: 3A for 10ms
Common: 10A for 10ms
Yn+1
Yes
Yn+11
Yes
Yn+2
Yes
Yn+12
Yes
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
450 mA
Yn+3
Yes
Yn+13
Yes
10 ms
Yn+4
Yes
Yn+14
Yes
10 ms
Yn+5
Yes
Yn+15
Yes
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Yn+6
No
Yn+16
No
Logic side
Yn+7
No
Yn+17
No
Fuses
(2) 4A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-4 (5 per pack)
4.6 oz. (130g)
n is the starting address
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Derating Chart
Points
12
0.5A / Pt.
OUT
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--12TR
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
CA
0
L
4
L
L
L
5
2
NC
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
L
NC
L
L
0.75A / Pt.
1
1.25A / Pt.
1.5A / Pt.
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
CA
Internal module circuitry
4
5
OUTP UT
L
3
NC
CB
0
0
4
L
L
0
2
3
L
4
5
4
5--240VAC
1.5A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1.5A
1
L
RELAY
8
1
5
1
2
CB
5
3
2
To LE D
4
NC
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
4A
3
L
e5–96
PLC Products
NC
D2--12TR
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DC Input/Relay Output Module
Company
Info.
PLCs
D2-08CDR 4-pt. DC In / 4pt. Relay Out
Output Specifications
<--->
Base Power Required 5VDC
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
4
30 VDC
19 VDC minimum
Max Inrush Current
3A for < 100 ms
10 A for < 10 ms (common)
7 VDC maximum
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
12 ms
Fuses (output circuits)
1 (6.3A slow blow, replaceable);
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
200 mA
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
3.5 oz. (100 g)
Input Specifications
Inputs per Module
Input Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Maximum Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Fuses (input circuits)
Field I/O
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
General Specifications
4 (sink/source)
8 (only first 4-pts. are used)
1
20-28 VDC
N/A
1
8mA @ 30 VDC
C-more &
other HMI
Relay, form A (SPST)
5-30 VDC; 5-240 VAC
AC Drives
30 VDC; 264 VAC
AC Motors
N/A
Power
Transmiss.
47 to 63 Hz
5 mA @ 5 VDC
Steppers/
Servos
1A/point ; 4A/module
0.1 mA @ 264 VAC
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
10 ms
4.7 k
5mA @ 24 VDC
Software
8 (only first 4-pts. are used)
Limit
Switches
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
4.5 mA
Encoders
1.5 mA
Current
Sensors
1 to 10 ms
Pressure
Sensors
1 to 10 ms
Derating Chart
Points
4
None
Outputs
1A / Pt.
Inputs
5mA /
Pt.
3
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
Voltage/Load
Current
Closures
24 VDC Resistive
24 VDC Solenoid
110 VAC Resistive
110 VAC Solenoid
220 VAC Resistive
220 VAC Solenoid
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
24VD C
2
1
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
0
IN/
OUT
A 0
1
2
3
D2--08CDR
Temp.
Sensors
24VDC
RELAY
0 B
1
2
3
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55°C
50
68
86 104 122131°F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Internal module circuitry
V+
Power
Source
Sink
+
D2--08CDR
20--28VDC
8mA
CA
--
CA
L
0
1
0
1
1
L
Sink
1
2
L
To LE D
0
L
L
Circuit
Protection
INP UT
O
2
2
L
2
3
L
Pneumatics
Appendix
24VDC
Part Index
Internal module circuitry
3
CB
OUTP UT
CB
L
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
5--240VAC
1A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1A
To LE D
COM
For “Sinking and Sourcing Concepts”, see the Appendix section in this catalog.
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Tools
Source
3
L
3
Optical
Is olator
COM
+
Enclosures
6.3A
PLC Products
e5–97
Analog Current Input Modules
F2-04AD-1 4-Channel 4-20mA Analog In
<--->
This module requires a 24 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-04AD-1L on
the next page if you want to use a 12 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Resolution
4, single ended (1 common)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.5% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.65% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
12-bit (1 in 4096)
Accuracy vs.Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC maximum full scale
(including max. offset change)
Active Low-pass Filtering
-3 dB at 80 Hz,2 poles
(-12 dB per octave)
Recommended Fuse
0.032 A, Series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
250 ±0.1%, 1/2W current input
Digital Input Points Required 2 channel ID bits, 2 diagnostic bits)
-40 mA to +40 mA, current input
Conversion Time
(PLC Update Rate)
1 channel per scan maximum (D230 CPU);
4 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Base Power Required 5 VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
4 to 20 mA current
16 (X) input points (12 binary data bits,
Successive approximation
±1 count
±12 counts max., @ 20 mA current input
±7 counts max.,@ 4mA current input
4ms to 95% of F.S. change
50 mA
80 mA maximum, +18 to +30 VDC
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
-4º to 158°F (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the
analog data value (1 in 4096).
Internal
Module
Wiring
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source
S ee NOTE 1
0 VDC
-+
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
CH1--
250
DC to DC
Converter
+24 VDC
+5V
IN
+15V
ANALOG
4CH
0V
--15V
CH1+
F 2--04AD--1
CH2--
250
CH2+
CH3--
250
CH3+
-CH3
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
CH4--
250
CH4+
-CH4
2-wire
4--20mA +
Trans mitter
+
Optional
E xternal
P /S
-+
-24VDC
OV
Analog S witch
+
-CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
A to D
Converter
18--30VDC
80mA
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
F 2--04AD--1
More than one external power supply can be used provided all the power supply commons are connected. A Series 217, 0.032A, fast-acting fuse is recommended for
4-20 mA current loops. If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0VDC on the module, then the output of the external transmitter
must be isolated. To avoid “ground loop” errors, recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are:
2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply.
4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20 mA output
e5–98
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Current Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-04AD-1L 4-Ch. 4-20mA Analog In <--->
Field I/O
This module requires a 12 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-04AD-1 on the
previous page if you want to use a 24 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Resolution
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
4, single ended (1 common)
Conversion Time
(PLC Update Rate)
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
4 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.5% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.65% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Accuracy vs.Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC maximum full scale
(including max. offset change)
Recommended Fuse
0.032A, Series 217 fast acting current inputs
4 to 20 mA current
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
16 (X) input points
-3 dB at 80 Hz, 2 poles (-12 dB per octave)
Digital Input Points Required (12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits,
250 ±0.1%, 1/2 W current input
2 diagnostic bits)
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
-40 mA to +40 mA, current input
Successive approximation
±1 count
±12 counts max., @ 20 mA current output
±7 counts max., @ 4 mA current input
4 ms to 95% of F.S. change
50 mA
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
90 mA maximum, +10 to +15 VDC
Steppers/
Servos
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
Motor
Controls
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
Proximity
Sensors
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Photo
Sensors
NEMA ICS3-304
Limit
Switches
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Encoders
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Internal
Module
Wiring
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
S ee NOTE 1
Pushbuttons/
Lights
0 VDC
-+
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
CH1--
250
DC to DC
Converter
+12VDC
+5V
IN
+15V
ANALOG
4CH
Relays/
Timers
0V
--15V
CH1+
250
CH2+
CH3--
250
CH3+
-CH3
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
CH4--
Analog S witch
+
-CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
A to D
Converter
250
CH4+
-CH4
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
+
Optional
E xternal
P /S
-+
Comm.
F 2--04AD--1L
CH2--
--
10--15 VDC
OV
Process
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
10--15VDC
90mA
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
0V
+12V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
F 2--04AD--1L
Part Index
More than one external power supply can be used provided all the power supply commons are connected. A Series 217, 0.032A,
fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4-20 mA current loops. If the power supply common of an external power supply is not
connected to 0 VDC on the module, then the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid "ground loop" errors,
recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are:
2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply.
4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20 mA output
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–99
Analog Current Input Modules
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.25% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
4 to 20 mA current
Accuracy vs.Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC maximum full scale
(including max. offset change of two counts)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Recommended Fuse
0.032A, Series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
F2-08AD-1 8-Channel 4-20mA Analog In <--->
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Resolution
Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
8, single ended (1 common)
Conversion Time (PLC
Update Rate)
(D2-230 CPU) 1 channel per scan maximum
(D2-240, D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs) 8
channels per scan maximum
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
-3dB at 200 Hz, (-6dB per octave)
16 (X) input points
Digital Input Points Required (12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits, 1 broken
250 ±0.1%, 1/2W current input
transmitter bit)
-45 mA to +45 mA
Successive approximation
±1 count
±5 counts max., @ 20 mA current input
±2 counts max., @ 4mA current input
7ms to 95% of F.S. change
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
50 mA
80 mA maximum, +18 to +30 VDC
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
One count in the specification table is equal to one least
significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
Internal
Module
Wiring
S ee NOTE 1
+24 VDC
--
+
+5V
+15V
0V
F2-08AD-1
CH2+
250
CH3+
CH4
3--wire
-4--20mA
Trans mitter
CH5+
250
CH6+
-CH6
2-wire
4--20mA
+
Trans mitter
CH7+
250
CH8+
-CH8
2-wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
250
+
Optional
E xternal
P /S
Analog S witch
CH4+
+
ANALOG
8CH
--15V
CH1+
-CH1
4--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
+
IN
DC to DC
Converter
0 VDC
18--30VDC
80mA
ANALOG IN
4--20mA
A to D
Converter
0V
+24V
CH1+
CH2+
CH3+
CH4+
CH5+
CH6+
CH7+
CH8+
-+
-24VDC
F 2--08AD--1
OV
More than one external power supply can be used provided all the power supply commons are connected. A Series 217, 0.032A, fast-acting fuse is recommended for
4-20 mA current loops. If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0 VDC on the module, then the output of the external transmitter
must be isolated. To avoid "ground loop" errors, recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are:
2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply.
4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20 mA output
e5–100
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Voltage Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-04AD-2 4-Channel Voltage Analog In <--->
Field I/O
This module requires a 24 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-04AD-2L on
the next page if you want to use a 12 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Resolution
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
4, single ended (1 common)
Conversion Time
(PLC Update Rate)
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
4 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (End to End)
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
±2 counts maximum (bi-polar)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.3% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Accuracy vs.Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change )
0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5V, ±10 V
Software
12 bit (1 in 4096)
input points
Digital Input Points Required 16(x)
(12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
-3 dB at 80 Hz, 2 poles (-12 dB per octave)
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
>20 M
-75 to +75 VDC
Successive approximation
±3 counts maximum
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
60 mA
AC Motors
90 mA maximum, +18 to +30 VDC
Power
Transmiss.
32º to 140ºF (0 to 60ºC)
-4º to 158°F (-20º to 70ºC)
Steppers/
Servos
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
Motor
Controls
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Proximity
Sensors
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Photo
Sensors
Removable; D2-8IOCON
±1 count maximum (0V input)
Limit
Switches
10 ms to 95% of F.S change
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of
the analog data value (1 in 4096).
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
18--26.4VDC
Typical Us er Wiring
S ee NOTE 1
+
Internal
Module
Wiring
--
0V
24 V
CH1--
DC to DC
Converter
+
-CH1
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
0V
18--30VDC
80mA
ANALOG IN
0--5VDC
- 5--+5VDC
CH1
CH2+
CH2
CH3-CH3+
+
--
CH3
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
CH3
CH4--
Analog S witch
CH2
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
Comm.
F 2--04AD--2
--15V
CH1+
--
Process
+5V
+15V
CH2-+
ANALOG
4CH
Relays/
Timers
0 VDC
+24 VDC
--
IN
A to D
Converter
Power
0V
+24V
Circuit
Protection
CH1-CH1+
Enclosures
CH2-Tools
CH2+
CH4+
CH4
+
CH3--
Pneumatics
CH3+
CH4--
-CH4
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
Appendix
CH4+
Part Index
0--10VDC
- 10--+10VDC
F 2--04AD--2
OV
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
PLC Products
e5–101
Analog Voltage Input Modules
F2-04AD-2L 4-Ch. Voltage Analog In <--->
This module requires a 12 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-04AD-2 if you
want to use a 24 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Resolution
Active Low-pass Filtering
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
4, single ended (1 common)
Conversion Time (PLC
Update Rate)
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
4 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (End to End)
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
±2 counts maximum (bi-polar)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.3% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Accuracy vs.Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
16 (X) input points
0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5V, ±10 V
Digital Input Points Required (12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
-3 dB at 80 Hz, 2 poles (-12 dB per octave)
>20 M
-75 to +75 VDC
Successive approximation
60 mA
90 mA maximum, +10 to +15 VDC
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
±3 counts maximum
±1 count maximum (0V input)
10 ms to 95% of F.S change
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog
data value (1 in 4096).
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
12 VDC
Typical
Us er
Wiring
Typical user
wiring
S ee NOTE 1
+
Internal
Internal module
Module
wiring
Wiring
--
0 VDC
--
+
--
12 V
CH1--
CH1
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
DC to DC
Converter
0V
+12VDC
IN
+5V
+15V
0V
CH1+
10--15VDC
90mA
ANALOG IN
0--5VDC
- 5--+5VDC
CH1
CH2
CH3--
--
CH3
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
+
CH3
CH4--
Analog S witch
CH2+
CH3+
+
F 2--04AD--2L
--15V
CH2-+
-CH2
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
ANALOG
4CH
A to D
Converter
0V
+12V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
CH4+
CH4
CH3-CH3+
CH4--
--
CH4
Voltage
+
Trans mitter
CH4+
0--10VDC
- 10--+10VDC
F 2--04AD--2L
OV
e5–102
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Voltage Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Voltage Analog In <--->
Number of Channels
Input Ranges
Field I/O
8, single ended (1 common)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±.3% 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
±50 ppm/ºC maximum full scale
(including max. offset change of 2 counts)
0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5V, ±10 VDC
Software
Resolution
12 bit (1 in 4095) uni-polar
13 bit (-4095 to 4095) bi-polar
Accuracy vs.Temperature
Active Low-pass Filtering
-3dB at 200 Hz,
(-6dB per octave)
Digital Input Points Required (12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits, 1 sign bit,
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Converter Type
>20 M
Conversion Time (PLC
Update Rate)
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
8 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (End to End)
Input Stability
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error not included)
Offset Calibration Error
Step Response
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
16 (X) input points,
Successive approximation
±1 count
±3 counts maximum
±1 count maximum (0V input)
4ms to 95% of F.S. change
60 mA
AC Motors
80 mA maximum, +18 to +26.4 VDC
Power
Transmiss.
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Steppers/
Servos
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Motor
Controls
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Proximity
Sensors
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Photo
Sensors
Removable; D2-8IOCON
See page 4-78 for part numbers
of ZIPLink cables and connection
modules compatible with this I/O
module.
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in
4096). Includes circuitry to automatically detect broken or open transmitters.
-
Process
24VDC
IN
ANALOG
0V
CH1+
F 2--08AD--2
CH2+
CH3+
CH5+
CH6+
CH7+
CH8 +
Circuit
Protection
0V
+24V
Enclosures
CH1+
CH2+
Tools
CH3+
CH4+
Pneumatics
CH5+
CH6+
Appendix
CH7+
Part Index
CH8+
F 2--08AD--2
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
18--26.2VDC
80mA
ANALOGIN
0--5VDC
- 5 - +5VDC
ADC
CH4+
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Analog Multiplexer
CH4
+
3-wire
+
Voltage
Trans mitter -
Current
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
0 VDC
CH3
+
4-wire
+ Voltage
- Trans mitter
Encoders
Temp.
Sensors
24VDC
CH2
+
2-wire
Voltage
Trans mitter -
Limit
Switches
Pressure
Sensors
Note 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source.
Note 2: Connect all external power supply commons.
Note 3: Connect unused channels (CH5+, CH6+, CH7+, CH8+ in this example) to 0VDC.
CH1
+
3-wire
+
Voltage
Trans mitter -
AC Drives
1 diagnostic bit)
-75 to +75 VDC
+
C-more &
other HMI
PLC Products
e5–103
Temperature Input Modules
F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD In
<--->
Number of Channels
4
Input Ranges
Type Pt100: -200.0/850.0ºC,
-328/1562ºF
Type Pt1000: -200.0/595.0ºC,
-328/1103ºF
Type jPt100: -38.0/450.0ºC,
-36/842ºF
Type CU-10/25ž: -200.0/260.0ºC,
-328/500ºF
Resolution
Display Resolution
RTD Excitation Current
Input Type
16 bit (1 in 65535)
Notch Filter
>100 db notches at 50/60 Hz
-3db=13.1Hz
Maximum Setting Time
Common Mode Range
Absolute Maximum
Ratings
Sampling Rate
100ms (full-scale step input)
Converter Type
Linearity Error
Maximum Inaccuracy
Charge Balancing
PLC Update Rate
4 channel/scan max., 240/250(-1)/D2-260CPUs
1 channel per scan max., 230 CPU
±.05ºC maximum, ±.01ºC typical
±1ºC
32 input points (16 binary data bits,
Digital Input Points Required 2 channel ID bits, 4 fault bits)
Base Power Required 5VDC
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Temperature Drift
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
±0.1ºC, ±0.1ºF (±3276.7)
200 µA
Differential
0-5 VDC
Fault protected inputs to ±50 VDC
160 ms per channel
90 mA
32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
None (self-calibrating)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Notes:
1. The three wires connecting the RTD to the module must be the same type and
length. Do not use the shield or drain wire for the third connection.
2. If an RTD sensor has four wires, the plus sense wire should be left unconnected
as shown.
3. This module is not compatible with the ZIPLink wiring systems.
Note 1
IN
Ch1 +
Ch1 -Ch2 +
Ch2 --
Note 2
Ch3 -Ch3 +
Ch4 -Ch4 +
x
200 A
Current
S ource
F 2--04RTD
Analog Multiplexer
C
C
RTD
TEMP
Ref.
Adj.
RTD
INP UT
CH1-CH1+
+
A/D
-
CH2-CH2+
COM
COM
0V
200 A
Current
S ource
CH3-CH3+
CH4-CH4+
F 2-04RTD
e5–104
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Temperature Input Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple In <--->
Field I/O
General Specifications
Thermocouple Specifications
Number of Channels
Common Mode Range
Common Mode Rejection
Input Impedance
Absolute Maximum Ratings
4, differential
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±5 ppm/ºC maximum full scale calibration
(including maximum offset change)
±5 VDC
90 dB min. @ DC, 150 dB min. @ 50/60 Hz.
Input Ranges
1 M
Fault-protected inputs to ±50 VDC
110 mA
Display Resolution
Cold Junction Compensation
Conversion Time
Warm-Up Time
Linearity Error (End to End)
Maximum Inaccuracy
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Voltage Input Specifications
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
Voltage Ranges
Resolution
Full Scale Calibration Error
(Offset Error Included)
Offset Calibration Error
Linearity Error (End to End)
Maximum Inaccuracy
4 channels per scan max.
D2-240/250(-1)/D2-260 CPU, H2-EBC(-F);
1 chan. per scan max. D2-230 CPU
PLC Update Rate
(X) input points (16 binary data bits,
Digital Input Points Required 32
2 channel ID bits, 4 diagnostic bits)
External Power Supply
Base Power Required 5VDC
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
Type J -190 to 760ºC
Type E -210 to 1000ºC
Type K -150 to 1372ºC
Type R 65 to 1768ºC
Type S 65 to 1768ºC
Type T -230 to 400ºC
Type B 529 to 1820ºC
Type N -70 to 1300ºC
Type C 65 to 2320ºC
60 mA maximum, 18 to 26.4 VDC
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Non-removable
-310 to 1400ºF
-346 to 1832ºF
-238 to 2502ºF
149 to 3214ºF
149 to 3214ºF
-382 to 752ºF
984 to 3308ºF
-94 to 2372ºF
149 to 4208ºF
±0.1ºC or ±0.1ºF
Automatic
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
100 ms per channel
Motor
Controls
30 minutes typically ± 1ºC repeatability
±.05ºC maximum, ±.01ºC typical
Proximity
Sensors
±3ºC (excluding thermocouple error)
0-5V, ±5V, 0-156.25 mV, ±156.25 mVDC
16 bit (1 in 65535)
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
±13 counts typical ±33 maximum
Encoders
±1 count maximum, @ 0V input
Current
Sensors
±1 count maximum
±.02% @ 25ºC (77ºF)
Pressure
Sensors
Notes:
Temp.
Sensors
1: Terminate shields at the respective signal source.
2: Connect unused channels to a common terminal (0V, CH4+, CH4).
3: When using 0-156 mV and 5V ranges, connect (-) or (0) volts terminal to 0V to
ensure common mode range acceptance.
Pushbuttons/
Lights
4. This module is not compatible with the ZIPLink wiring system.
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Thermocouple input wiring diagram
Voltage input wiring diagram
IN
See Notes 1 and 2
See Notes 2 and 3
CH1+
CH1
Examples of differential
thermocouple wiring
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
CH1+
Voltage
Trans mitter
CH1
F 2--04THM
Circuit
Protection
CH2+
CH4+
Module S upply
CH4
24
VDC
+24VDC
CH3+
Voltage
Trans mitter
Trans mitter
S upply
CH3
+
--
CH4+
CH4
0V
24
VDC
0V
Module S upply
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
ADC
CH3
CH2
Analog Mux
CH3+
CH2+
Voltage
Trans mitter
ADC
Analog Mux
CH2
Examples of grounded
thermocouple wiring
TEMP
VOLT
Enclosures
CH1+
CH1
CH2+
CH2
CH3+
CH3
CH4+
CH4
+24V
0V
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
+24VDC
0V
0V
PLC Products
e5–105
Analog Current Output Modules
F2-02DA-1 2-Channel 4-20 mA Analog Output <--->
This module requires a 24 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-02DA-1L on
the next page if you want to use a 12 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
0.3% @ 32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Base Power Required 5VDC
40 mA
Single ended, one common
External Power Supply
18 to 30 VDC, 60 mA.
(add 20 mA for each current loop used)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
Digital Output Points
Required
Maximum Loop Supply
2
Peak Output Voltage
40 VDC
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
Maximum Load/Power
Supply
0 minimum
4 to 20 mA
16 (Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
30 VDC
620 /18 V, 910 /24 V, 1200 / 30V
1 channel per scan maximum D2-230 CPU
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
PLC Update Rate
Linearity Error (end to end)
Conversion Settling Time
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error included)
Offset Calibration Error
-4 to 158ºF(-20 to 70ºC)
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
±1 count (±0.025% of full scale) maximum
100 µs maximum (full scale change)
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module or the OV of the R/S.
NOTE 2: Unused current outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum
power consumption.
± 5 counts max., 20 mA @77ºF (25ºC)
± 3 counts max., 4 mA @ 77ºF (25Cº)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Internal
Module
Wiring
OUT
0 VDC
Typical user wiring
DC to DC
Converter
+24 VDC
60mA
CH1-See
NOTE 1
Ch 1 load
250Ω typical
CH2-CH2+
D to A
Converter
N/C
Ch 2
Current sinking
N/C
Transient protected
precision digital to analog
converter output circuits
--
Maximum user load is dependent upon loop power
supply
e5–106
PLC Products
Load range
0 to 1200
0 to 910
0 to 620
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
0V
+24V
CH1-CH1+
CH2-CH2+
NC
NC
NC
NC
24 VDC
Loop power supply
30 VDC
24 VDC
18 VDC
F2--02DA--1
Ch 1
Current sinking
N/C
+
0V
D to A
Converter
N/C
Ch 2 load
250Ω typical
+5V
+15V
--15V
CH1+
ANALOG
2CH
F2--02DA--1
OV
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Current Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-02DA-1L 2-Ch 4-20 mA Analog Output <--->
Field I/O
This module requires a 12 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-02DA-1 on the
previous page if you want to use a 24 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
+0.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±0.3% @ 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Base Power Required 5VDC
40 mA
Single ended, 1 common
External Power Supply
10 to 15 VDC, 70 mA
(add 20 mA for each current loop used)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
Digital Output Points
Required
Maximum Loop Supply
2
Peak Output Voltage
40 VDC
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
Maximum Load/Power
Supply
0 minimum
4 to 20 mA
16(Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
30 VDC
620/18V, 910/24V, 1200/30V
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
PLC Update Rate
Linearity Error (end to end)
Conversion Settling Time
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error included)
Offset Calibration Error
C-more &
other HMI
AC Drives
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Steppers/
Servos
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Motor
Controls
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Proximity
Sensors
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog
data value (1 in 4096).
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Software
100 µs maximum (full scale change)
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module or the OV of the P/S.
±5 counts max., 20 mA @ 77ºF (25ºC)
NOTE 2: Unused current outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum
power consumption.
±3 counts max., 4mA @ 77ºF (25ºC)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Internal
Module
Wiring
Typical User Wiring
Process
OUT
70mA + 20mA
for each loop
0 VDC
DC to DC
Converter
+12 VDC
CH1--
+5V
+15V
Comm.
F 2--02DA--1L
CH1+
Ch 1 load
250Ω typical
CH2--
D to A
Converter
CH2+
Ch 1
Current s inking
N/C
D to A
Converter
N/C
Ch 2
Current s inking
N/C
+
10--15 VDC
70mA
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
0V
CH1--
--
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Tools
CH2--
Pneumatics
NC
NC
Appendix
NC
Part Index
NC
F 2--02DA--1L
Maximum user load is dependent upon loop power supply.
Load range (ohm)
0 to 450
0 to 300
0 to 200
Enclosures
CH1+
12 VDC
Loop power supply
15 VDC
12 VDC
10 VDC
Circuit
Protection
CH2+
Transient protected
precision digital to analog
converter output circuits
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
+ 12V
N/C
Ch 2 load
250Ω typical
Relays/
Timers
0V
--15V
S ee
NOTE 1
ANALOG
2CH
OV
PLC Products
e5–107
Analog Current Output Modules
F2-02DAS-1 2-Channel Isolated 4-20 mA Analog Output
<--->
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
2, isolated
Digital Output Points
Required
32 (Y) output points
(16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits,
1 output enable bit)
Isolation Voltage
±750 V continuous, channel to channel,
channel to logic
Base Power Required 5VDC
Loop Supply
External Power Supply
Output Loop Compliance
Load Impedance
Maximum Load/ Power
Supply
100 mA
4 to 20 mA
16 bit (1 in 65536)
Current sourcing
18-32 VDC
18-32 VDC @ 50 mA per channel
Vin - 2.5V
0-1375 (@ 32 V)
Linearity Error (end to end)
Gain Calibration Error
Offset Calibration Error
Output Drift
±10 count (±0.015% of full scale) maximum
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.07% @ 25ºC (77ºF)
0.18% 0 to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)
±32 counts (±0.05%)
±13 counts (±0.02%)
50 ppm/ºC
-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
375 /12 V, 975 /24 V, 1375 /32 V
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Conversion Settling Time
3ms to 0.1% of full scale
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the
analog data value (1 in 65536).
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module.
NOTE 2: Load must be within compliance voltage.
NOTE 3: For non-isolated outputs, connect all 0V’s together (0V1…0V2) and
connect all +V’s together (+V1…+V2).
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
Internal module
wiring
OUT
Typical user wiring
ANALOG
2CH
0 V1
-Trans mitter
S upply
18--32VDC +
Ch 1 load
0--1375 ohms
NOTE 2
+V1
4--20mAcurrent sourcing
--I1
F 2--02DAS --1
+I1
D/A
S ee
NOTE 1
18--32VDC
N/C
100 ohms
ANALOG OUT
4--20mA
N/C
0V1
0V2
-Trans mitter
S upply
18--32VDC +
+V1
+V2
4--20mAcurrent sourcing
--I1
+I1
--I2
N/C
Ch 2 load
0--1375 ohms
NOTE 2
+I2
D/A
S ee
NOTE 1
S ee
NOTE 3
100 ohms
N/C
0V2
+V2
--I2
+I2
F 2--02DAS --1
e5–108
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Current Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-08DA-1 8-Channel 4-20mA Analog Output
<--->
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
8, single-ended
Digital Output Points
Required
16 (Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits, 1 output
enable bit)
Base Power Required 5VDC
Maximum Loop Voltage
30 mA
External Power Supply
18 to 30 VDC, 50 mA., class 2
(add 20 mA for each current loop used)
Source Load
Sink Load
Total Load (sink + source)
Field I/O
Linearity Error (end to end)
±2 count (±0.050% of full scale) maximum
Full Scale Calibration Error
± 12 counts max. sinking @ any load
± 12 counts max. sourcing @ 125 load
± 18 counts max. sourcing @ 250 load
± 26 counts max. sourcing @ 400 load
± 9 counts max. sinking @ any load
± 9 counts max. sourcing @ 125 load
± 11 counts max. sourcing @ 250 load
± 13 counts max. sourcing @ 400 load
AC Drives
Offset Calibration Error
0.5% sinking (any load) sinking & sourcing @
125 load
0.64% sourcing @ 250 load
0.83% sourcing @ 400 load
Power
Transmiss.
4 to 20 mA
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Current sinking or current sourcing
30 VDC
Maximum Full Scale
Inaccuracy @ 60ºC
0-400 @ 18-30 VDC
Maximum Full Scale
Inaccuracy @ 25ºC
0-600 /18V, 0-900 /24 V, 0-1200 /30 V
(Incudes all errors and temp drift)
600 /18 V, 900 /24 V, 1200 /30 V
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
8 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Conversion Settling Time
400 µs maximum (full scale change)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
0.3% sinking (any load) sinking & sourcing @
125 load
0.44% sourcing @ 250 load
0.63% sourcing @ 400 load
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
Software
C-more &
other HMI
AC Motors
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
-4 to 158ºF(-20 to 70ºC)
Photo
Sensors
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
Limit
Switches
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Encoders
NEMA ICS3-304
Current
Sensors
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module.
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Appendix
Part Index
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–109
Analog Voltage Output Modules
F2-02DA-2 2-Channel Voltage Analog Output <--->
This module requires a 24 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-02DA-2L on
the next page if you want to use a 12 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
Digital Output Points
Required
2
Peak Output Voltage
15 VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
Load Capacitance
2000 minimum
PLC Update Rate
0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5V, ±10 V
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
+0.3% unipolar ranges @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±0.45% unipolar ranges >77ºF (25ºC)
±0.4% bipolar ranges @77ºF (25ºC)
±0.55% bipolar ranges >77ºF (25ºC)
Base Power Required 5VDC
40 mA
External Power Supply
18 to 30 VDC, 60 mA (outputs fully loaded)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Single ended, 1 common
16 (Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
.01 µF maximum
1 channel per scan maximum D2-230 CPU
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240, D2250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (end to end)
Conversion Settling Time
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error included)
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Offset Calibration Error
±3 counts max., unipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±8 counts max., bipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
5µs maximum (full scale change)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
±12 counts max. unipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±16 counts max. bipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables and
connection modules compatible with this I/O module.
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the
analog data value (1 in 4096).
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module or the OV of the
R/S.
NOTE 2: Unused voltage outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.
Internal
Internal module
Modulewiring
Wiring
24 VDC
+
0 VDC
Ch 1 load
2K
minimum
DC to DC
Converter
Typical
Wiring
Typical Us
usererwiring
S ee
NOTE 1
OUT
--
+24 VDC
60mA
CH1--
+5V
+15V
0V
F 2--02DA--2
--15V
CH1+
Ch 1
Voltage s ink/s ource
CH2--
Ch 2 load
2K
minimum
ANALOG
2CH
D to A
Converter
CH2+
N/C
N/C
N/C
18--30VDC
60mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
- 5--+5VDC
0V
+24V
Ch 2
Voltage s ink/s ource
CH1--
D to A
Converter
CH2--
CH1+
CH2+
NC
N/C
Trans
ient protected
precis ion
Transient
protected precision
digital to
digital to analog converter
analog converter output circuits
output circuits
NC
NC
NC
0--10VDC
- 10--+10VDC
F 2--02DA--2
OV
e5–110
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Voltage Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-02DA-2L 2-Channel Voltage Analog Output <--->
This module requires a 12 VDC user power supply for operation. See the F2-02DA-2 on the
previous page if you want to use a 24 VDC supply. All other specifications are the same.
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
Digital Output Points
Required
2
Peak Output Voltage
15 VDC
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
Load Capacitance
2000 minimum
PLC Update Rate
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
+0.3% unipolar ranges @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±0.45% unipolar ranges >77ºF (25ºC)
±0.4% bipolar ranges @77ºF (25ºC)
±0.55% bipolar ranges >77ºF (25ºC)
0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5V, ±10 V
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
Single ended, 1 common
16 (Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
.01 µF maximum
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Linearity Error (end to end)
Conversion Settling Time
Full Scale Calibration Error
(offset error included)
±1 count (0.025% of full scale) maximum
Offset Calibration Error
±3 counts max., unipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±8 counts max., bipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
40 mA
10 to 15 VDC, 70 mA (outputs fully loaded)
AC Drives
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
AC Motors
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
Power
Transmiss.
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Steppers/
Servos
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
Motor
Controls
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Proximity
Sensors
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Photo
Sensors
5 µs maximum (full scale change)
±12 counts max. unipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±16 counts max. bipolar @ 77ºF (25ºC)
Limit
Switches
Encoders
See page 4-78 for part numbers of
ZIPLink cables and connection modules
compatible with this I/O module.
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).
Temp.
Sensors
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module or the OV of the P/S.
NOTE 2: Unused voltage outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.
Pushbuttons/
Lights
12 VDC
Typical user wiring
+
Process
Internal
Internal
module
Module
wiring
Wiring
OUT
--
ANALOG
2CH
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
0 VDC
Ch 1 load
2K
minimum
Ch 2 load
2K
minimum
DC to DC
Converter
S ee
NOTE 1
+12 VDC
70mA
CH1--
+5V
+15V
0V
F 2--02DA--2L
--15V
CH1+
Ch 1
Voltage s ink/s ource
CH2-D to A
Converter
CH2+
N/C
Ch 2
Voltage s ink/s ource
N/C
Transient protectedDprecision
to A digital
to analog converter
output circuits
Converter
N/C
Power
10--15 VDC
70mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
- 5--+5VDC
Circuit
Protection
0V
+ 12V
Enclosures
CH1-Tools
CH1+
CH2--
Pneumatics
CH2+
NC
N/C
Trans ient protected precis ion
digital to analog converter
output circuits
Appendix
NC
Part Index
NC
NC
0--10VDC
- 10--+10VDC
F 2--02DA--2L
OV
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
PLC Products
e5–111
Analog Voltage Output Modules
F2-02DAS-2 2-Channel 0-5V, 0-10V Isolated
Analog Output <--->
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
Digital Output Points
Required
2, isolated
Isolation Voltage
±750 V continuous, channel to channel,
channel to logic
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Load Impedance
60 mA
0-5V, 0-10V
16 bit (1 in 65536)
Sourced through external loop supply
32 (Y) output points
(16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits)
21.6-26.4 VDC @ 60 mA per channel
2 k min
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
2 channels per scan maximum (D2-240, D2250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Conversion Settling Time
3ms to 0.1% of full scale
Linearity Error (end to end)
Gain Calibration Error
Offset Calibration Error
Output Drift
±10 count (±0.015% of full scale) maximum
Maximum Inaccuracy
0.07% @ 25ºC (77ºF)
0.18% 0 to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
0º to 60ºC (32º to 140ºF)
±32 counts (±0.05%)
±13 counts (±0.02%)
50 ppm/ºC
-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
See page 4-78 for part numbers of
ZIPLink cables and connection modules
compatible with this I/O module.
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module or the OV of the P/S.
Internal
Module
Wiring
OUT
ANALOG
2CH
0 V1
-Trans mitter
S upply
24 VDC +
+V1
CH1-V
Ch 1 load
2kohms
NOTE 2
CH1+V
S ee
NOTE 1
N/C
D/A
100 ohms
N/C
Voltage Source
0V1
0V2
--
Trans mitter
S upply
24 VDC +
+V1
+V2
CH1-V
CH1+V
CH2-V
Ch 2 load
2kohms
NOTE 2
N/C
CH2+V
D/A
100 ohms
Voltage Source
N/C
0V2
+V2
CH2-V
CH2+V
F 2--02DAS --2
e5–112
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog Voltage Output Modules
Company
Info.
PLCs
F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Voltage Analog Output
<--->
Field I/O
Number of Channels
Output Ranges
Resolution
Output Type
8, single-ended, 1 common
Digital Output Points
Required
16 (Y) output points
(12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits,
1 output enable bit)
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
60 mA
Peak Output Voltage
15 VDC
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
Load Impedance
Load Capacitance
1-10 k
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V
12 bit (1 in 4096)
Voltage sourcing
21.6-26.4 VDC, 140 mA (outputs fully loaded)
0.01 µF maximum
PLC Update Rate
1 channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU)
8 channels per scan maximum (D2-240,
D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
Conversion Settling Time
400 µs maximum (full scale change)
4.5 ms to 9ms for digital out to analog out
Linearity Error (end to end)
Full Scale Calibration Error
Offset Calibration Error
±1 count (±0.025% of full scale) maximum
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±57 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change of 2 counts)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±0.3% @ 25ºC (77ºF)
±0.45% @ 0-60ºC (32-140ºF)
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
0º to 60ºC (32º to 140°F)
±12 counts max. unipolar @ 25ºC (77ºF)
Software
±3 counts max., unipolar @ 25ºC (77ºF)
C-more &
other HMI
AC Motors
Power
Transmiss.
-20º to 70ºC (-4º to 158ºF)
Steppers/
Servos
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
Motor
Controls
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
Proximity
Sensors
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Photo
Sensors
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the
analog data value (1 in 4096).
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink
cables and connection modules compatible
with this I/O module.
AC Drives
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V of the module.
+
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Internal
Internal module
Module
wiring
Wiring
18--30VDC
@ 90mA
OUT
ANALOG
8CH
--
Typical user wiring
0 VDC
Ch 1 load
1K--10K ohms
minimum
+V1
DC to DC
Converter
+24 VDC
S ee
NOTE 1
Relays/
Timers
+5V
+15V
0V
Comm.
F 2--08DA--2
--15V
+V2
Ch 1
Voltage s ource
+V3
+V4
D to A
Converter
+V5
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
18--30VDC
90mA
ANALOG OUT
0--5VDC
0--10VDC
Power
0V
+24V
Circuit
Protection
+V1
+V2
+V6
Enclosures
+V3
+V7
S ee
NOTE 1
Ch 8 load
1K--10K ohms
minimum
+V8
Process
Ch 8
Voltage s ource
D to A
Converter
+V4
Tools
+V5
+V6
Pneumatics
+V7
Appendix
+V8
Part Index
F 2--08DA--2
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–113
Analog In/Out Combination Module
F2-4AD2DA 4-Channel Analog Input /
2-Channel Analog Output <--->
Number of Input Channels
Number of Output Channels
Ranges
Resolution
Peak Withstanding Voltage
Maximum Continuous
Overload
4, single-ended (1 common)
2, single-ended (1 common)
External Load Resistance
Maximum Loop Supply
Recommended Fuse
Maximum Load/Power
Supply
Active Low-pass Filter
Linearity Error (best fit)
Output Settling Time
±50 ppm/ºC full scale calibration change
(including maximum offset change)
Maximum Inaccuracy
±0.1% @ 77ºF (25ºC)
±0.3% @ 32 to 140ºF (0 to 60ºC)
Digital Input and Output
Points Required
16 (X) input points (12 binary data bits,
2 channel ID bits, 2 diagnostic bits)
16 (Y) output points (12 binary data bits,
2 channel enable bits)
PLC Update Rate
4 channels per scan maximum:
(D2-240, D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
2 output channels per scan maximum:
(D2-240, D2-250(-1) and D2-260 CPUs)
1 input and 1 output channel per scan maximum:
(D2-230 CPU)
4 to 20 mA current (current sinking)
12 bit (1 in 4096)
75 VDC, current outputs
-40 to +40 mA, each current output
250 , ±0.1%, 1/2 W,
25 ppm/ºC current input resistance
Input Impedance
Accuracy vs. Temperature
0 minimum, current outputs
Base Power Required 5VDC
External Power Supply
Requirement
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Environmental Air
Vibration
Shock
Noise Immunity
Terminal Type (included)
30 VDC
0.032 A, series 217 fast-acting, current inputs
910 /24 V, current outputs
620 /18 V, 1200 /30 V
-3 dB @ 20 Hz, 2 poles (-12 dB per octave)
±1 count (±0.025% of full scale) maximum
100 µs maximum (full scale change)
See page 4-78 for part numbers of ZIPLink cables
and connection modules compatible with this I/O
module.
90 mA
18-26.4 VDC @ 80 mA
20 mA per loop
32º to 140ºF (0º to 60ºC)
-4º to 158ºF (-20º to 70ºC)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
NEMA ICS3-304
Removable; D2-8IOCON
One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog
data value (1 in 4096).
Note 6: If an analog channel is connected backwards, then
erroneous data values will be returned for that channel.
Note 1: Shields should be connected at their respective signal source.
Note 7: To avoid small errors due to terminal block losses,
connect 0 VDC, IN-, and OUT- on the terminal block as
shown. The module’s internal connection alone of these
nodes is not sufficient to permit module performance up
to the accuracy specifications.
Note 2: Unused channel should remain open for minimum power consumption.
Note 3: More than one external power supply can be used provided the power supply commons are
connected.
Note 4: A Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4-20 mA current input loops.
Note 8: Choose an output transducer resistance according to the
maximum load/power listed in the Output Specifications.
Note 5: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0 VDC on the
module, then the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid "ground
loop" errors, recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are:
2 or 3 wire: isolation between Input signal and power supply
4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20 mA output.
Module S upply
Typical user wiring
24VDC
S ee NOTE 1
+
InternalInternal
module
Module
wiring
--
IN/
OUT
Wiring
--
+
-CH1
4--wire
4--20mA +
Trans mitter
DC to DC
Converter
0 VDC
+24 VDC
IN--
+
-CH2
3--wire
+
4--20mA
Trans mitter
ANALOG
+5V
+15V
0V
--15V
F 2--4AD2DA
IN1+
IN2+
F us e
IN3+
F us e
-CH3
2-wire
4--20mA +
Trans mitter
-CH4
2-wire
4--20mA +
Trans mitter
18 26.4 VDC
80 mA
ANALOG
4 IN/ 2 OUT
4--20mA
250
250
A to D
Converter
F us e
OUT--
CH1+
250
OUT1+
IN
D to A
Converter
OUT2+
Ch 1
Current s inking
Ch 1 load
0--910
(@ 24V)
D to A
Converter
Ch 2
Current s inking
--
S ee NOTE 8
+
+24V
IN--
250
F us e
Ch 2 load
0--910
(@ 24V)
0V
IN4+
Loop S upply
CH 2+
CH3+
CH4+
OUT--
OUTCH1+
CH2+
F2--4AD2DA
0V
S ee NOTE 1
e5–114
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Analog In/Out Combination Module
Company
Info.
PLCs
NOT SUPPORTED IN D2-230 AND D2-240 CPUS.
Input Channels per Module
Input Range
Resolution
External DC Power Required
Max. Continuous Overload
Input Impedance
Filter Characteristics
Conversion Method
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximum Inaccuracy
Linearity Error
(End to End)
Full Scale Calibration Error
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
Rec. Fuse (external)
Base Power Required 5VDC
Field I/O
4 to 20 mA
Software
100 0.1% 1/4W
Active low pass, -3dB @ 80 Hz
Max. Offset Calibration Error ±0.1% of range max.
8, single ended (one common)
0 to 20 mA
12, 14, 16-bit selectable
100 mA @ 18-26.4 VDC
±45 mA
12-bit = 1.5 ms per channel
14-bit = 6 ms per channel
16-bit = 25 ms per channel
Conversion Time
4
Output Channels per Module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
Load Impedance
Max. Inaccuracy
Max. Full Scale Calibration
Error (not incl. offset error)
F2-8AD4DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input / 4-Channel
Analog Current Output <--->
Accuracy vs. Temperature
16-bit, 0.244 mA/bit
Current sourcing at 20 mA max.
C-more &
other HMI
0-750 AC Drives
0.25% of range
AC Motors
±0.075% of range max.
Power
Transmiss.
±25 ppm/ °C max. full scale calibration change
(± 0.0025% of range / °C)
Max. Crosstalk at DC,
50/60Hz
-70 dB, 1 LSB
0.1% of range
Linearity Error (End to End)
±1 count max. (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
12-bit = ±2 count max. (±0.06% of range)
14-bit = ±10 count max. (±0.06% of range)
16-bit = ±20 count max. (±0.06% of range)
Monotonic with no missing codes
Output Stability
and Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
Max. Continuous Overload
Over sampling successive approximation
±25 ppm / °C Max.
±0.07% of range max.
±0.03% of range max.
Type of Output Protection
35 mA
Output Signal at
Power-up and Power-down
Terminal Type (included)
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
±1 LSB after 10 min. warm-up typical
Limit
Switches
0.005% of full scale
0.5 ms max., 5 µs min. (full scale change)
Encoders
Outputs open circuit protected
Electronically current limited to 20 mA or
less
0.032A, Littelfuse Series 217 fast-acting
Steppers/
Servos
Current
Sensors
Pressure
Sensors
4 mA
Temp.
Sensors
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Process
Internal module wiring
+
-+
-+
-+
-3--wire 4--20mA +
transmitter
User 24VDC
supply
24VDC+
0VDC--
4--20mA output
Channel 1
See Note 2
COM
→ I3+
See Note 1
100Ω
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 5
Transmitter power
COM
100Ω
CH1 ADC
CH2 ADC
F2-8AD4DA--1
18-- 26.4VDC
@ 100 mA
ANALOG
8 IN 0-- 20mA
4 OUT 4-- 20mA
0V
OUT2
CH3 ADC
OUT3
CH4 ADC
0V
100Ω
COM
100Ω
→ I8+
100Ω
100Ω
CH5 ADC
CH6 ADC
IN3
0V
Power
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
OUT4
Pneumatics
IN1
0V
Appendix
IN4
0V
CH7 ADC
IN6
CH8 ADC
IN7
IN5
Part Index
0V
IN8
Isolated analog
circuit common
Note 1: A Littlefuse Series 217, 0.032A fast--acting fuse is recommended for all 4--20mA current loop inputs.
Note 2: Connect shields to the 0V of the module; do not connect both ends of shield.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
24V
OUT1
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 8
See Note 2
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
IN2
→ I5+
AC or DC
4--wire 4--20mA
transmitter
CH4 DAC
100Ω
4--20mA transmitter
shield, Channel 3
See Note 2
CH3 DAC
100Ω
0.032A
2--wire 4--20mA
transmitter
CH2 DAC
← I3+
← I4+
COM
4--20mA output
Channel 4
See Note 2
CH1 DAC
COM
4--20mA output
Channel 3
ANALOG
Isolated analog
circuit power
← I1+
← I2+
4--20mA output
Channel 2
IN /
OUT
PLC Products
e5–115
Analog In/Out Combination Module
F2-8AD4DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input / 4-Channel
Analog Voltage Output <--->
Input Channels per Module
Input Range
Resolution
External DC Power Required
Max. Continuous Overload
Input Impedance
Filter Characteristics
8, single ended (one common)
0 to 10 V
12, 14, 16-bit selectable
80 mA @ 18-26.4 VDC
±100 V
>10 M
Active low pass, -3 dB @ 80Hz
12-bit = 1.5 ms per channel
14-bit = 6 ms per channel
16-bit = 25 ms per channel
Conversion Time
Conversion Method
Accuracy vs. Temperature
Maximim Inaccuracy
Linearity Error (End to End)
Full Scale Calibration Error
(not including offset error)
Offset Calibration Error
Base Power Required 5VDC
Over sampling successive approximation
±50 ppm / °C Max.
Output Channels per Module
Output Range
Resolution
Output Type
Load Impedance
Max. Inaccuracy
Max. Full Scale Calibration
Error (not incl. offset error)
Max. Offset Calibration Error
4
Accuracy vs. Temperature
±50 ppm/ °C max. full scale calibration change
(± 0.005% of range / °C)
Max. Crosstalk
@ DC, 50/60Hz
-70 dB, 1 LSB
Linearity Error (End to End)
±1 count max. (±0.025% of full scale)
Monotonic with no missing codes
0.1% of range
12-bit = ±1 count max. (±0.025% of range)
14-bit = ±4 count max. (±0.025% of range)
16-bit = ±16 count max. (±0.025% of range)
Monotonic with no missing codes
±0.075% of range max.
±0.025% of range max.
Output Stability and
Repeatability
Output Ripple
Output Settling Time
Max. Continuous Overload
Type of Output Protection
35 mA
Output Signal at
Power-up and Power-down
Terminal Type (included)
0 - 5V, 0 - 10V
0 to 5V at 15-bit, 0 to10V at 16-bit, 152 µV/bit
Voltage sourcing/sinking at 10 mA max.
>1000 0.15% of range
±0.075% of range max.
±0.025% of range max.
±1 LSB after 10 min. warm-up typical
0.005% of full scale
0.5 ms max., 5µs min. (full scale change)
Outputs current limited to 15 mA typical
1 VDC peak output voltage
(clamped by transient voltage suppressor)
0V
Removable; D2-16IOCON
IN /
OUT
Internal module wiring
+
User 24VDC
supply
24VDC+
0VDC--
Voltage output
Channel 1
-+
V1+
V2+
Voltage output
Channel 2
-+
COM
V3+
V4+
COM
Voltage output
Channel 3
-+
--
See Note 1
3--wire voltage
transmitter
+
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 3
COM
V3+
COM
See Note 1
V5+
2--wire voltage
transmitter
CH2 DAC
CH3 DAC
CH4 DAC
CH2 ADC
CH3 ADC
CH4 ADC
Transmitter power
V8+
F2-8AD4DA--2
18-- 26.4V
80mA
8 INPUTS
0-- 10V
4 OUTPUTS
0-- 5/0-- 10V
0V
OUT2
OUT3
0V
IN2
CH5 ADC
COM
AC or DC
4--wire voltage
transmitter
CH1 DAC
CH6 ADC
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 5
See Note 1
Isolated analog
circuit power
CH1 ADC
Voltage output
Channel 4
ANALOG
IN3
24V
OUT1
0V
OUT4
IN1
0V
IN4
0V
CH7 ADC
IN6
CH8 ADC
IN7
IN5
0V
IN8
Voltage transmitter
shield, Channel 8
Isolated analog
circuit common
See Note 1
Note 1: Connect shields to the 0V of the module; do not connect both ends of shield.
e5–116
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 Instruction Set
Boolean Instructions
Store (STR)
Begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally
open contact.
Store Not (STRN)
Begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally
closed contact.
Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Begins a new rung or an additional branch in
a rung with a normally open contact.
Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Begins a new wrung or an additional branch
in a rung with a normally closed contact.
Or (OR)
Logically ors a normally open contact in parallel with another contact
in a rung.
Or Not (ORN)
Logically ors a normally closed contact in parallel with another contact
in a rung.
Or Bit-of-Word (ORB)
And if Not Equal (ANDNE)
Connects a normally closed comparative contact in series with another
contact. The contact will be on when A is not equal to B.
Store (STR)
Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Ors a normally closed contact in parallel with
another contact in a rung.
And (AND)
Logically ands a normally open contact in series with another contact
in a rung.
And Not (ANDN)
Logically ands a normally closed contact in series with another contact
in a rung
And Bit-of-Word (ANDB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Ands a normally open contact in series with
another contact in a rung.
And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Ands a normally closed contact in series with
another contact in a rung.
And Store (AND STR)
Logically ands two branches of a rung in series.
Or Store (OR STR)
Logically ors two branches of a rung in parallel.
Out (OUT)
Reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off)
state to the specified image register point or memory location.
Or Out(OR OUT)
Reflects the status of the rung and outputs the discrete (ON/OFF) state
to the image register. Multiple OR OUT instructions referencing the
same discrete point can be used in the program.
Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Reflects status of the rung (on/off) and outputs
the discrete (on/off) state to the specified bit in the referenced memory
location.
Not (NOT)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Inverts the status of the rung at the point of
the instruction.
Positive differential (PD)
One-shot output coil. When the input logic produces an off to on transition, the output will energize for one CPU scan.
Store Positive Differential (STRPD)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Leading edge triggered one-shot contact.
When the corresponding memory location transitions from low to
high, the contact comes on for one CPU scan.
Store Negative Differential (STRND)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Trailing edge triggered one-shot contact.
When the corresponding memory location transitions from high to low,
the contact comes on for one CPU scan.
Or Positive Differential (ORPD)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ors a leading edge triggered oneshot contact in parallel with another contact in a rung.
Or Negative Differential (ORND)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ors a trailing edge triggered one-shot
contact in parallel with another contact in a rung.
And Positive Differential (ANDPD)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ands a leading edge triggered oneshot contact in series with another contact in a rung.
And Negative Differential (ANDND)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ands a trailing edge triggered oneshot contact in series with another contact in a rung.
Set (SET)
An output that turns on a point or a range of points. The reset instruction is used to turn the point(s) OFF that were set ON with the set
instruction.
Reset (RST)
An output that resets a point or a range of points.
Set Bit-of-Word (SETB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Sets or turns on a bit in a V memory location.
Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Resets or turns off a bit in a V memory location.
Pause outputs (PAUSE)
Disables the update for a range of specified output points.
Comparative Boolean Instructions
Store if Equal (STRE)
Begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally
open comparative contact. The contact will be on when
A = B.
Store if Not Equal (STRNE)
Begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally
closed comparative contact. The contact will be on when A is not
equal to B.
Or if Equal (ORE)
Connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when A = B.
Or if Not Equal (ORNE)
Connects a normally closed comparative contact in parallel with
another contact. The contact will be on when A is not equal to B.
And if Equal (ANDE)
Connects a normally open comparative contact in series with another
contact. The contact will be on when A = B.
Load Formatted (LDF)
Loads the accumulator with a specified number of consecutive discrete
memory bits.
Load Address (LDA)
Begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a
normally open comparative contact. The will be on when A > B.
Store Not (STRN)
Begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally
closed comparative contact. The contact will be on when A < B.
Or (OR)
Loads the accumulator with the HEX value for an octal constant
(address).
Load Accumulator Indexed (LDX)
Specifies a source address (V memory) which will be offset by the
value in the first stack location.
Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants (LDSX)
connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another
contact. The contact will be on when A > B.
Or Not (ORN)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Specifies a Data Label Area (DLBL)
where numerical or ASCII constants are stored.
PLCs
Field I/O
Software
C-more &
other HMI
Out (OUT)
connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another
contact. The contact will be on when A < B.
And (AND)
Copies the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a specified
V memory location.
AC Drives
Out Double (OUTD)
Connects a normally open comparative contact in series with another
contact. The contact will be on when A > B.
And Not < (ANDN)
Connects a normally closed comparative contact in parallel with
another contact. The contact will be on when A < B.
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Ors a normally open contact in parallel with
another contact in a rung.
Company
Info.
Immediate Instructions
Store Immediate (STRI)
Begins a rung/branch of logic with a normally open contact. The contact will be updated with the current input field status when processed
in the program scan.
Store Not Immediate (STRNI)
Begins a rung/branch of logic with a normally closed contact. The contact will be updated with the current input field status when processed
in the program scan.
Or Immediate (ORI)
Connects a normally open contact in parallel with another contact. The
contact will be updated with the current input field status when
processed in the program scan.
Copies the value in the accumulator to two consecutive V memory
locations.
Outputs a specified number of bits (1-32) from the accumulator to the
specified discrete memory locations.
Out Least (OUTL)
And Immediate (ANDI)
Connects a normally open contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be updated with the current input field status when
processed in the program scan.
And Not Immediate (ANDNI)
Connects a normally closed contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be updated with the current input field status when
processed in the program scan.
Out Immediate (OUTI)
Reflects the status of the rung. The output field device status is updated
when the instruction is processed in the program scan.
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)
Reflects the status of the rung and outputs the discrete (ON/OFF) state
to the image register. Multiple OR OUT instructions referencing the
same discrete point can be used in the program. The output field
device status is updated when the instruction is processed in the program scan.
Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF)
D2-260 only. Outputs the contents of the accumulator to a specified
number of consecutive outputs The output field devices are updated
when the instruction is processed by the program scan.
Set Immediate (SETI)
An output that turns on a point or a range of points. The reset instruction is used to turn the point(s) off that were set. The output field device
status is updated when the instruction is processed in the program
scan.
Reset Immediate (RSTI)
an output that resets a point or a range of points. The output field
device status is updated when the instruction is processed in the program scan.
Load Immediate (LDI)
D2-260 only. Loads the accumulator with the contents of a specified
16-bit V-memory location. The status for each bit of the specified Vmemory location is loaded into the accumulator. Typically used for
input module V-memory addresses. Allows you to specify the V-location instead of the X location and the number of points as with the
LDIF.
Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF)
D2-260 only. Loads the accumulator with a specified number of consecutive inputs. The field device status for the specified inputs points is
loaded into the accumulator when the instruction is executed
Timer, Counter, and Shift Register Instructions
Timer (TMR)
Single input incrementing timer with 0.1 second resolution (0-999.9
seconds)
Fast Timer (TMRF)
Single input incrementing timer with 0.01 second resolution (0-99.99
seconds)
Accumulating Timer (TMRA)
Two input incrementing timer with 0.1 second resolution (09,999,999.9 sec.). Time and enable/reset inputs control the timer.
Power
Transmiss.
D2-260 only. Copies the value in the lower 8-bits of the accumulator
to the lower 8-bits of a specified V-memory location
Out Most (OUTM)
D2-260 only. Copies the value in the upper 8-bits of the lower accumulator word (1st 16 bits) to the upper 8 bits of a specified V-memory
location
Output indexed (OUTX)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Copies a 16-bit value from the first level of
the accumulator stack to a source address offset by the value in the
accumulator
Pop (POP)
Moves the value from the first level of the accumulator stack to the
accumulator and shifts each value in the stack up one level.
Or Not Immediate (ORNI)
Connects a normally closed contact in parallel with another contact.
The contact will be updated with the current input field status when
processed in the program scan.
AC Motors
Out Formatted (OUTF)
Logical Instructions (Accumulator)
And (AND)
Logically ands the lower 16 bits in the accumulator with a V memory
location.
And Double (ANDD)
Logically ands the value in the accumulator with an 8-digit constant or
a value in two consecutive V-memory locations.
And Formatted (ANDF)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ands the value in the accumulator
and a specified range of discrete memory bits (1-32)
And with stack (ANDS)
D2-260 only. Logically ands the value in the accumulator with the first
value in the accumulator stack
Steppers/
Servos
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
Photo
Sensors
Limit
Switches
Encoders
Current
Sensors
Or (OR)
Logically ors the lower 16 bits in the accumulator with a V memory
location.
Or Double (ORD)
Logically ors the value in the accumulator with an 8-digit constant or a
value in two consecutive V-memory locations.
Or Formatted (ORF)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Logically ors the value in the accumulator
with a range of discrete bits (1-32)
Or with Stack (ORS)
D2-260 only. Logically ors the value in the accumulator with the first
value in the accumulator stack
Pressure
Sensors
Temp.
Sensors
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Exclusive Or (XOR)
Performs an Exclusive Or of the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator and a V-memory location.
Process
Exclusive Or Double (XORD)
Performs an Exclusive Or of the value in the accumulator and an 8digit constant or a value in two consecutive V-memory locations.
Exclusive Or Formatted (XORF)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Performs an exclusive or of the value in the
accumulator and a range of discrete bits (1-32)
Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS)
D2-260 only. Performs an exclusive or of the value in the accumulator
and the first accumulator stack location
Compare (CMP)
Compares the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a V
memory location.
Relays/
Timers
Comm.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Compare Double (CMPD)
Compares the value in the accumulator with two consecutive V memory locations or an 8-digit constant.
Power
Compare Formatted (CMPF)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Compares the value in the accumulator with
a specified number of discrete locations (1-32)
Compare with Stack (CMPS)
D2-260 only. Compares the value in the accumulator with the first
accumulator stack location
Compare Real Number (CMPR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Compares the real number in the accumulator with two consecutive V-memory locations or a real number constant.
Circuit
Protection
Enclosures
Tools
Pneumatics
Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)
Two input incrementing timer with 0.1 second resolution (0999,999.99 sec.). Time and enable/reset inputs control the timer
Appendix
Counter (CNT)
Two input incrementing counter (0-9999). Count and reset inputs control the counter.
Part Index
Stage Counter (SGCNT)
Single input incrementing counter (0-9999) RST instruction must be
used to reset count.
Up Down Counter (UDC)
Three input counter (0-99,999,999). Up, down and reset inputs control
the counter.
Shift Register (SR)
Shifts data through a range of control relays with each clock pulse.The
data clock and reset inputs control the shift register.
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data
Load (LD)
Loads a 16-bit word into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator/stack.
Load Double (LDD)
Loads a 32-bit word into the accumulator/stack.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–117
DL205 Instruction Set
Math Instructions (Accumulator)
Add (ADD)
Adds a BCD value in the lower 16 bits in the accumulator with a V
memory location. The result resides in the accumulator.
Add Double (ADDD)
Adds a BCD value in the accumulator with two consecutive V memory locations or an 8-digit constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Add Real Number (ADDR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Adds a real number in the accumulator
with a real number constant or a real number contained in two consecutive V-memory locations. The result resides in the accumulator.
Subtract (SUB)
Subtract a BCD value, which is either a V memory location or a 4digit constant from the lower 16 bits in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator.
Subtract Double (SUBD)
Subtracts a BCD value, which is either two consecutive V memory
locations or an 8-bit constant, from a value in the accumulator. The
result resides in the accumulator.
Subtract Real Number (SUBR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Subtracts a real number, which is either two
consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit constant, from the real
number in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Multiply (MUL)
Multiplies a BCD value, which is either a V memory location or a 4digit constant, by the value in the lower 16 bits in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.
Multiply Double (MULD)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Multiplies a BCD value contained in two
consecutive V memory locations by the value in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.
Multiply Real Number (MULR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Multiplies a real number, which is either
two consecutive V-memory locations or a real number constant, by
the real number in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Divide (DIV)
Divides a BCD value in the accumulator by a BCD value which is
either a V memory location or a 4-digit constant. The result resides in
the accumulator.
Divide Double (DIVD)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Divides a BCD value in the accumulator
by a BCD value which is either two consecutive V memory locations
or a 8-digit constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Divides Real Number (DIVR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Divides a real number in the accumulator
by a real number which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or a real number constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Increment (INC)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Increments a BCD value in a specified V
memory location by 1 each time the instruction is executed.
Decrement (DEC)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Decrements a BCD value in a specified V
memory location by 1 each time the instruction is executed.
Add Binary (ADDB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Adds the binary value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator to a value which is either a V memory location or
a 16-bit constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Add Binary Double (ADDBD)
D2-260 only. Adds the binary value in the accumulator to a value
which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or a 32-bit constant. The result resides in the accumulator
Subtract Binary (SUBB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Subtract a 16-bit binary value, which is
either a V memory location or a 16-bit constant, from the lower 16
bits in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD)
D2-260 only. Subtracts a 32-bit binary value, which is either two
consecutive V-memory locations or a 32-bit constant, from the value
in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator
Multiply Binary (MULB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Multiples a 16-bit binary value, which is
either a V memory location or a 16-bit constant, by the lower 16 bits
in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Divide Binary (DIVB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Divides the binary value in the lower 16
bits in the accumulator by a value which is either a V memory location or a 16-bit constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Increment Binary (INCB)
Increments a binary value in a specified V memory location by 1
each time the instruction is executed.
Decrement Binary (DECB)
Decrements a binary value in a specified V memory location by 1
each time the instruction is executed.
Add Formatted (ADDF)
D2-260 only. Adds the BCD value in the accumulator to a value
which is a range of discrete bits (1-32). The result resides in the accumulator
Subtract Formatted (SUBF)
D2-260 only. Subtracts a BCD value which is a range of discrete bits
(1-32) from the BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator
Multiply Formatted (MULF)
D2-260 only. Multiplies a BCD value in the lower 16-bits in the
accumulator by a BCD value which is a range of discrete bits (1-16).
The result resides in the accumulator
Divide Formatted (DIVF)
D2-260 only. Divides the BCD value in the lower 16-bits in the
accumulator by the BCD value which is a range of discrete bits (116). The result resides in the accumulator
Add Top of Stack (ADDS)
D2-260 only. Adds the BCD value in the accumulator with the BCD
value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator
Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS)
D2-260 only. Subtracts the BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack from the BCD value in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator
Multiply Top of Stack (MULS)
D2-260 only. Multiplies a 4-digit BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack by a 4-digit BCD value in the accumulator. The
e5–118
PLC Products
result resides in the accumulator
Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS)
D2-260 only. Divides the 8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by
the 4-digit BCD value in the first level of the accumulator by the 4digit BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result
resides in the accumulator
Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS)
D2-260 only. Adds the binary value in the accumulator with the
binary value in the first accumulator stack location. The result resides
in the accumulator
Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS)
D2-260 only. Subtracts the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack from the binary value in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator
Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS)
D2-260 only. Multiplies the 16-bit binary value in the first level of
the accumulator stack by the 16-bit binary value in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator
Divide Binary Top of Stack (DIVBS)
D2-260 only. Divides a value in the accumulator by the binary value
in the top location of the stack. The accumulator contains the result
Transcendental Instructions (D2-260 only)
Square Root Real (SQRTR)
Takes the square root of the real number stored in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.
Sine Real (SINR)
Takes the sine of the real number stored in the accumulator. The
result resides in the accumulator.
Cosine Real (COSR)
Takes the cosine of the real number stored in the accumulator. The
result resides in the accumulator.
Tangent Real (TANR)
Takes the tangent of the real number stored in the accumulator. The
result resides in the accumulator.
ARC Sine Real (ASINR)
Takes the inverse sine of the real number stored in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.
ARC Cosine Real (ACOSR)
Takes the inverse cosine of the real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
ARC Tangent Real (ATANR)
Takes the inverse tangent of the real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Bit Instructions (Accumulator)
Sum (SUM)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Counts the number of bits set to "1" in the
accumulator. The HEX result resides in the accumulator..
Shift Left (SHFL)
Shifts the bits in the accumulator a specified number of places to the
left.
Shift Right (SHFR)
Shifts the bits in the accumulator a specified number of places to the
right.
Rotate Left (ROTL)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Rotates the bits in the accumulator a specified number of places to the left.
Rotate Right (ROTR)
Table Instructions
Move (MOV)
Moves the values from one V memory table to another V memory
table.
Move Memory Cartridge/Load Label (MOVMC/LDLBL)
Copies data between V memory and program ladder memory.
Set Bit (SETBIT)
D2-260 only. Sets a single bit (to a 0) in a V-memory location.
Reset Bit (RSTBIT)
D2-260 only. Resets a single bit (to a 0) in a V-memory location.
Extended Table Instructions (D2-260 only)
Fill (FILL)
Fills a table of specified V-memory locations with a value which is
either a V-memory location or a 4-digit constant.
Find (FIND)
Finds a value in a V-memory table and returns the table position containing the value to the accumulator.
Find Greater Than (FDGT)
Finds a value in a V-memory table which is greater than the specified
search value. The table position containing the value is returned to
the accumulator.
Find Block (FINDB)
Finds a block of data values in a V-memory table and returns the
starting address of the table containing the values to the accumulator.
Table to Destination (TTD)
Moves the value form the top of a V-memory table to a specified Vmemory location. The table pointer increments each scan.
Remove from Bottom (RFB)
Moves the value from the bottom of a v-memory table to a specified
V-memory location. The table pointer increments each scan.
Source To Table (STT)
Moves a value from a specified V-memory location to a V-memory
table. The table pointer increments each scan.
Remove from Top (RFT)
Pops a value from the top of a V-memory table and stores it in a
specified V-memory location. All other values in the V-memory table
are shifted up each time a value is popped from the table.
Add To Top of Table (ATT)
Pushes a value from a specified V-memory location onto the top of a
V-memory table. All other values in the V-memory table are shifted
down each time a value is pushed onto the table.
Table Shift Left (TSHFL)
Shifts s specified number of bits to the left in a V-memory table.
Table Shift Right (TSHFR)
Shifts a specified number of bits to the right in a V-memory table.
And Move (ANDMOV)
Copies data from a table to the specified location, ANDing each
word with the accumulator data as it is written.
Or Move (ORMOV)
Copies data from a table to the specified memory location, ORing
each word with the accumulator data as it is written.
Exclusive Or Move (XORMOV)
Copies data from a table to the specified memory location, XORing
each word with the accumulator data as it is written.
Swap (SWAP)
Exchanges the data in two tables of equal length.
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Rotates the bits in the accumulator a specified number of places to the right.
Encode (ENCO)
Encodes the bit position set to 1 in the accumulator, and returns the
appropriate binary representation in the accumulator.
Decodes (DECO)
Decodes a 5 bit binary value (0-31) in the accumulator by setting the
Clock / Calender Instructions
Date (DATE)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Use to set the date in the CPU.
Time (TIME)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Use to set the time in the CPU.
CPU Control Instructions
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)
Binary (BIN)
Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to the equivalent binary
value. The result resides in the accumulator.
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
Converts the binary value in the accumulator to the equivalent BCD
value. The result resides in the accumulator.
Invert (INV)
Takes the one's complement of the 32-bit value in the accumulator.
The result resides in the accumulator.
Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL
No Operation (NOP)
Inserts a no operation coil at specified program address.
End (END)
Marks the termination point for the normal program scan. An End
instruction is required at the end of the main program body.
Stop (STOP)
Changes the operational mode of the CPU from Run to Program
(Stop)
Reset Watchdog Timer (RSTWT)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Resets the CPU watchdog timer.
Takes the 10’s complement (BCD) of the 8-digit accumulator.
ASCII to HEX (ATH)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts a table of ASCII values to a table
of hexadecimal values.
HEX to ASCII (HTA)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts a table of hexadecimal values to a
table of ASCII values.
Segment (SEG)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts four digit HEX value in accumulator to seven segment display format.
Gray Code to BCD (GRAY)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts a 16-bit GRAY code
value in the accumulator to a corresponding BCD value. The result
resides in the accumulator.
Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Shuffles a maximum of 8 digits,
rearranging them in a specified order. The result resides in the accumulator.
Radian Real Conversion (RADR)
D2-260 only. Converts the real degree value in the accumulator to
the equivalent real number in radians. The result resides in the accumulator
Degree Real Conversion (DEGR)
D2-260 only. Converts the real radian value in the accumulator to
the equivalent real member of degrees. The result resides in the
accumulator
Binary to Real Number (BTOR)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts the binary value in the accumulator into a real number. The result resides in the accumulator.
Real to Binary (RTOB)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Converts the real number in the accumulator into a binary value. The result resides in the accumulator.
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
DL205 Instruction Set
Company
Info.
PLCs
Program Control Instructions
Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Skips all instructions between the
Goto and corresponding LBL instructions.
For/Next (FOR/NEXT)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Executes the logic between the FOR
and NEXT instructions a specified number of times.
Goto Subroutine (GTS/SBR/RT/RTC)
GTS, SBR, RT: D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
RTC: D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
When a GTS instruction is executed the program jumps to the SBR
(Subroutine). The subroutine is terminated with a RT instruction (unconditional return). When a return is executed, the program continues
from the instruction after the calling GTS instruction. The RTC
(Subroutine return conditional) instruction is used with an input contact
to implement a conditional return from the subroutine.
Master Line Set/Master Line Reset (MLS/MLR)
Allows the program to control sections of ladder logic by forming a
new power rail. The MLS marks the beginning of a power rail and the
MLR marks the end of the power rail control.
Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt Routine/Interrupt Return/Interrupt Return
Conditional (INT/IRT/IRTC)
INT, IRT: D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
IRTC: D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
When a hardware or software interrupt occurs, the interrupt routine
will be executed. The INT instruction is the beginning of the interrupt
routine. The interrupt routine is terminated with an IRT of the interrupt
routine. The in interrupt routine is terminated with an IRT instruction
(unconditional interrupt return). When a interrupt return is reached the
execution of the program continues from the instruction where the program execution was prior to the interrupt.
Enable Interrupt (ENI)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Enables hardware and software interrupts to be acknowledged.
Disable Interrupt (DISI)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Disables hardware and software
interrupts from being acknowledged.
Intelligent I/O Instructions
Read from Intelligent Module (RD)
Reads a block of data from an intelligent I/O module into CPU’s V
memory.
Write to Intelligent Module (WT)
Writes a block of data to an intelligent I/O module from a block of
CPU’s V memory.
Message Instructions
Fault/Data Label (FAULT/DLBL)
FAULT: D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
DLBL: All D2 CPUs.
Displays a V memory value or a data label constant to the hand-held
programmer or personal computer using DirectSOFT.
Numerical Constant/ASCII constant (NCON/ACON)
Stores constants in numerical or ASCII form for use with other instructions.
Print Message (PRINT)
D2-250-1, D2-260 only.
Prints the embedded text or text/data variable message to the specified
communications port. Maximum message length is 255 words.
appropriate bit position to 1 in the accumulator.
Network Instructions
Drum Instructions (D2-250-1, D2-260 only)
Tuned Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM)
Field I/O
Time driven drum with up to 16 steps and 16 discrete output points.
Output status is written to the appropriate output during each step.
Specify a time base per count (in milliseconds). Each step can have a
different number of counts to trigger the transition to the next step. Also
define preset step as destination when reset occurs.
Software
Time & Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (EDRUM)
C-more &
other HMI
Time and/or event driven drum with up to 16 steps and 16 discrete
output points. Output status is written to the appropriate output during
each step. Specify a time base per count (in milliseconds). Each step
can have a different number of counts and an event to trigger the
counting. Once the time has expired, a transition to the next step
occurs. Also define preset step as destination when reset occurs.
AC Drives
Time and Event Drum with Discrete Outputs and Output
Mask (MDRMD)
AC Motors
Time and/or event driven drum with up to 16 steps and 16 discrete
output points. Actual output status is the result of a bit-by-bit AND
between the output mask and bit mask in the step. Specify a time base
per count (in milliseconds). Each step can have a different number of
counts and an event to trigger the counting. Once the time has expired,
a transition to the next step occurs. Also define present step as destination when reset occurs.
Power
Transmiss.
Steppers/
Servos
Time and Event Drum with Word Output and Output
Mask (MDRMW)
Time and/or event driven drum with up to 16 steps and a single Vmemory output location. Actual output word is the result of a bit-by-bit
AND between the word mask and the bit mask in the step. Specify a
time base per count (in milliseconds). Each step can have a different
number of counts and an event to trigger the counting. Once the time
has expired, a transition to the next step occurs. Also define preset step
as destination when reset occurs.
Motor
Controls
Proximity
Sensors
RLLPLUS Programming Instructions
Photo
Sensors
(D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only)
Initial stage (ISG)
Limit
Switches
The initial stage instruction is used for a starting point for user application program. The ISG instruction will be active on power up and PROGRAM to RUN transitions.
Stage (SG)
Encoders
Stage instructions are used to create structured programs. They are program segments which can be activated or deactivated with control
logic.
Current
Sensors
Jump (JMP)
Normally open coil that deactivates the active stage and activates a
specified stage when there is power flow to the coil.
Not Jump (NJMP)
Pressure
Sensors
Normally closed coil that deactivates the active stage and activates a
specified stage when there is power flow to the coil.
Converge Stages (CV)
Converge stages are a group of stages that when all stages are active
the associated converge jump(s). (CVJMP)will activate another stage(s).
One scan after the CVJMP is executed, the converge stages will be
deactivated.
Temp.
Sensors
Converge Jump (CVJMP)
Pushbuttons/
Lights
Normally open coil that deactivates the active CV stages and activates
a specified stage when there is power flow to the coil.
Block Call/Block/Block End (BCALL w/BLK and BEND)
BCALL is a normally open coil that activates a block of stages when
there is power flow to the coil. BLK is the label which marks the beginning of a block of stages. Bend is a label used to mark the end of a
block of stages
Process
Relays/
Timers
Read from network (RX)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Reads a block of data from another
CPU on the network.
Comm.
Write to network (WX)
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260 only. Writes a block of data from the master device to a slave device on the network.
Terminal
Blocks &
Wiring
Modbus Instructions (D2-260 only)
Modbus Read (MRS)
Used CPU port 2 to read a block of data from Modbus RTU devices on
the network.
Power
Modbus Write (MWX)
Writes a block of data from CPU port 2 to Modbus RTU devices on the
network.
Circuit
Protection
ASCII Instructions (D2-260 only)
ASCII IN (AIN)
Enclosures
Configures port 2 to read raw ASCII input strings.
ASCII Find (AFIND)
Searches ASCII strings in V-memory to find a specific portion of the
string.
Tools
ASCII IN (AEX)
Extracts a specific portion from an ASCII string.
Pneumatics
Compare V-memory (CMPV)
Compares two blocks of V-memory.
Swap Bytes (SWAPB)
Appendix
Swaps V-memory bytes.
Print to V-memory (VPRINT)
Used to send pre-coded ASCII strings to a pre-defined V-memory
address when enabled.
Part Index
Print from V-memory (PRINTV)
Used to write raw ASCII string out of port 2 when enabled.
w w w. a u to m at i o n d i re c t . c o m / d l 205
PLC Products
e5–119
IBox Instructions
The IBox instructions are available when using a
D2-250-1 CPU with firmware version 4.60 or later,
D2-260 CPU with firmware version 2.40 or later, and
DirectSOFT5.
IBox Instructions - Analog Helper
Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup
(ANLGCMB)
Generates the logic to configure the pointer method for an analog
input/output combination module.
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN)
Generates the logic to configure the pointer method for an analog
input module.
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT)
Generates the logic to configure the pointer method for an analog
output module.
Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL)
Scales a 12 bit BCD analog value (0-4095 BCD) into BCD engineering
units. Only works with unipolar unsigned raw values.
Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB)
Scales a 12 bit binary analog value (0-4095 decimal) into Binary
engineering units. Only works with unipolar unsigned raw values.
Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER)
Performs a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time interval
(BCD).
Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB)
Perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time interval
(binary).
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL)
Monitors a BCD value V memory location and sets four possible alarm
states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low.
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB)
Monitors a binary (decimal) value V memory location and sets four
possible alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low.
IBox Instructions - Discrete Helper
Off Delay Timer - (OFFDTMR)
Delays the "turning off" of the Output parameter by the specified Off
Delay Time (in hundredths of a second).
On Delay Timer - (ONDTMR)
Delays the "turning on" of the Output parameter by the specified
amount of time (in hundredths of a second).
One Shot - (ONESHOT)
Turns on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON
transition.
Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF)
Toggles an output state whenever its input power flow transitions from
off to on. Also known as a “flip-flop” circuit.
IBox Instructions - Memory
Move Single Word (MOVEW)
Moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via
a pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer.
Move Double Word (MOVED)
Moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations
directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant,
from a double memory location, or indirectly through a pointer to a
double memory location.IBox Instructions (Memory)
IBox Instructions - Math
BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR)
Converts the given 4 digit WORD BCD value to a Real number, with
the implied number of decimal points (K0-K4).
Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point
(BCDTORD)
Converts the given 8 digit DWORD BCD value to a Real number,
given an implied number of decimal points (K0-K8).
Math - BCD (MATHBCD)
Allows entry of complex mathematical expressions like in Visual Basic,
Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4
levels deep. Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word
BCD formatted value.
Math - Binary (MATHBIN)
Allows entry of complex mathematical expressions like in Visual Basic,
Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4
levels deep. Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word
binary formatted value.
Math - Real (MATHR)
Allows entry of complex mathematical expressions like in Visual Basic,
Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4
levels deep. Every V-memory reference MUST be able to fit into a
double word Real formatted value.
Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding
(RTOBCD)
Converts the absolute value of the given Real number to a 4 digit BCD
number, compensating for an implied number of decimal points (K0K4) and performs rounding.
Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and
Rounding (RTOBCDD)
Square Real (SQUARER)
Squares the given REAL DWORD number and writes it to a REAL
DWORD result.
Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD)
Sums a list of consecutive 4-digit WORD BCD numbers into an 8-digit
DWORD BCD result.
Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN)
Sums a list of consecutive 16-bit WORD binary numbers into a 32-bit
DWORD binary result.
Sum Real Numbers (SUMR)
Sums a list of consecutive Real DWORD numbers into a Real
DWORD result.
IBox Instructions - Communications
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100)
Defines the common information for a specific ECOM100 module
which is used by the other ECOM100 IBoxes and resides at the top of
the ladder/stage program. If using more than one ECOM100 in a PLC
system, a different ECOM100 Configuration IBox must be used for
each ECOM100 module that utilizes ECOM IBox instructions.
ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD)
Commands the ECOM100 to use its internal TCP/IP settings.
ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE)
Commands the ECOM100 to obtain its TCP/IP settings from a DHCP
server.
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ)
Determines if DHCP is enabled in the ECOM100.
ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL)
Allows the ECOM100 to behave as an EMail client to send an SMTP
request to the SMTP Server for sending the EMail messages to EMail
addresses in the To: field and also to those listed in the Cc: list hard
coded in the ECOM100. Messages are limited to 100 characters for
the entire instruction.
ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS)
Restores the original EMail Setup data stored in the ECOM100 back to
the working copy based on the specified ECOM100#.
ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP)
Modifies the working copy of the EMail setup currently in the
ECOM100 based on the specified ECOM100#. You may pick and
choose any or all fields to be modified using this instruction.
ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP)
Configures the three TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100: IP Address,
Subnet Mask and Gateway Address.
ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES)
Reads the ECOM100's Description field up to the number of specified
characters.
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA)
Reads the ECOM100's Gateway address and stores it in 4 consecutive
V memory locations in decimal format.
ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP)
Reads the ECOM100's IP address and stores it 4 consecutive V memory locations in decimal format.
IBox Instructions - Counter I/O
CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO)
Defines the common information for a specific CTRIO module which
is used by the other CTRIO IBox instructions and resides at the top of
the ladder/stage program. If using more than one CTRIO module in a
PLC system, a different CTRIO Configuration IBox must be used for
each CTRIO module that utilizes any CTRIO IBox instructions.
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT)
Appends an entry to the end of a memory based Preset Table on a
specific CTRIO Output resource. Will take more than 1 PLC scan
to execute.
CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT)
Clears the RAM based Preset Table on a leading edge transition to this
IBox. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT)
Edits a single entry in a Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output
resource. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL)
Performs dual operation to a CTRIO Output resource in one CTRIO
command. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT)
Creates a single entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a
specific CTRIO Output resource. Will take more than 1 PLC scan
to execute.
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table on Reset (CTRINTR)
Configures the initial Preset Table to be automatically loaded whenever
the Reset event occurs on a specific Output resource. Will take more
than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR)
Loads a CTRIO Profile File to a CTRIO Output resource on a leading
edge transition to this IBox. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER)
Gets the decimal error code value from the CTRIO module and places
it into the specified Error Code register. Since the Error Code in the
CTRIO is only maintained until another CTRIO command is given, this
instruction must be used immediately after the CTRIO IBox that reports
an error via its Error bit parameter.
CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM)
Loads the Run to Limit command and given parameters on a specific
Output resource. The CTRIO’s Input(s) must be configured as Limit(s)
for this function to operate. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM)
Loads the Run to Position command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO)
Loads the Velocity command and given parameters on a specific
Output resource. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR)
Writes the runtime changes made to a loaded CTRIO Preset Table back
to Flash ROM. Will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute.
ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID)
Reads the ECOM100's binary (decimal) WORD sized Module ID and
stores it in V memory.
ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM)
Reads the ECOM100's Module Name up to the number of specified
characters and stores it in V memory.
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM)
Reads the ECOM100's Subnet Mask address and stores it 4 consecutive V memory locations in decimal format.
ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES)
Writes the specified Description to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA)
Writes the specified Gateway IP Address to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP)
Writes the specified IP Address to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID)
Writes the specified Module ID to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM)
Writes the specified Name to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM)
Writes the specified Subnet Mask to the ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX)
Performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify communications networking.
ECOM100 WX Network Write (ECWX)
Performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify communications networking.
NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG)
Defines all the common information necessary for performing RX/WX
Networking using the NETRX and NETWX IBox instructions via a local
CPU serial port, DCM or ECOM module.
Network RX Read (NETRX)
Performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify communications networking.
Network WX Read (NETWX)
Performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify communications networking.
Converts the absolute value of the given Real number to an 8 digit
DWORDBCD number, compensating for an implied number of decimal points (K0-K8) and performs rounding.
Square BCD (SQUARE)
Squares the given 4-digit WORD BCD number and writes it as an
8-digit DWORD BCD result.
Square Binary (SQUAREB)
Squares the given 16-bit WORD binary number and writes it as a 32bit DWORD binary result.
e5–120
PLC Products
1 - 80 0 - 633 - 0405
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement